October 2015
First Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKT
Litho in U.S.A.
GE9J 19A321 AA
Owner’s Manual
2016 MKT
Owner’s Manual
2016 MKT
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design
or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language in any
form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2015
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20150925170338
Introduction
About This Manual............................................7
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
Data Recording..................................................9
California Proposition 65................................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services..........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Special Notices.................................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment...........13
Export Unique Options...................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment..........................15
Child Safety
General Information........................................16
Installing Child Restraints..............................18
Booster Seats..................................................30
Child Restraint Positioning...........................33
Child Safety Locks..........................................34
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation...................................36
Fastening the Seatbelts................................37
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................42
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime............................................................43
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................44
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance................................................45
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™...............................47
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...................................48
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................49
Front Passenger Sensing System...............51
Side Airbags.....................................................53
Safety Canopy™...............................................54
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........55
Airbag Disposal...............................................57
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.................................................58
Remote Control...............................................59
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control..........................................................62
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...................................63
Creating a MyKey...........................................64
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................65
Checking MyKey System Status.................67
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems.........................................................68
MyKey Troubleshooting................................68
Locks
Locking and Unlocking..................................70
Power Liftgate..................................................73
Keyless Entry....................................................76
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System............................79
1
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Anti-Theft Alarm...............................................81
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................82
Audio Control...................................................83
Voice Control...................................................83
Cruise Control..................................................83
Information Display Control.........................84
Heated Steering Wheel.................................84
Pedals
Adjusting the Pedals......................................85
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers.........................................86
Autowipers.......................................................86
Windshield Washers.......................................87
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............87
Lighting
General Information.......................................89
Lighting Control..............................................89
Autolamps........................................................90
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.........................91
Headlamp Exit Delay......................................91
Daytime Running Lamps...............................92
Automatic High Beam Control....................92
Front Fog Lamps.............................................94
Headlamp Leveling........................................94
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................94
Direction Indicators........................................95
Welcome Lighting...........................................95
Interior Lamps..................................................96
Ambient Lighting............................................96
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows...............................................97
Global Opening and Closing.......................98
Exterior Mirrors................................................98
Interior Mirror.................................................100
Sun Visors.......................................................100
Moonroof..........................................................101
Instrument Cluster
Gauges.............................................................103
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................104
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............107
Information Displays
General Information......................................108
Information Messages..................................115
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control..........................127
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate.........................................................129
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............130
Heated Windows and Mirrors.....................131
Cabin Air Filter................................................131
Remote Start...................................................132
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position....................133
Head Restraints.............................................133
Power Seats....................................................136
Memory Function..........................................138
Rear Seats.......................................................140
Heated Seats..................................................148
Climate Controlled Seats............................150
2
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener................152
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points..................................157
Storage Compartments
Center Console.............................................159
Overhead Console.......................................160
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information.......................................161
Keyless Starting..............................................161
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................162
Engine Block Heater....................................165
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions........................................167
Fuel Quality.....................................................168
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................169
Running Out of Fuel.....................................169
Refueling..........................................................170
Fuel Consumption.........................................172
Emission Control System.............................173
Transmission
Automatic Transmission...............................177
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive...................................181
Brakes
General Information.....................................190
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes..........................................................190
Parking Brake..................................................191
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..................................192
Using Traction Control.................................192
Stability Control
Principle of Operation..................................194
Using Stability Control.................................195
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation..................................196
Rear Parking Aid............................................197
Active Park Assist..........................................197
Rear View Camera.......................................203
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation.................................206
Using Cruise Control...................................206
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................207
Driving Aids
Driver Alert......................................................215
Lane Keeping System..................................216
Blind Spot Information System..................221
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................224
Steering..........................................................228
Collision Warning System..........................229
Drive Control.................................................232
Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................234
Cargo Nets.....................................................234
3
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Luggage Covers...........................................234
Load Limit.......................................................235
Towing
Towing a Trailer.............................................243
Trailer Sway Control....................................244
Recommended Towing Weights...............244
Essential Towing Checks............................246
Transporting the Vehicle............................249
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................250
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels - 3.5L
Ecoboost™/3.7L..........................................251
Driving Hints
Breaking-In.....................................................253
Economical Driving......................................253
Driving Through Water...............................253
Floor Mats......................................................254
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...................................256
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................257
Fuel Shutoff....................................................257
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................258
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need.................261
In California (U.S. Only)...............................262
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)........................263
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only)...........................................264
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.......................................................265
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature....................................................266
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......267
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)............................................................267
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart............................269
Changing a Fuse..........................................285
Maintenance
General Information.....................................286
Opening and Closing the Hood...............287
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................288
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................290
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L....................292
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L EcoBoost™......294
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Ecoboost™/
3.7L..............................................................294
Engine Oil Check.........................................294
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................295
Engine Coolant Check................................296
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................300
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check - 3.5L
Ecoboost™/3.7L.........................................300
Brake Fluid Check.......................................302
Power Steering Fluid Check......................303
Washer Fluid Check....................................303
Changing the 12V Battery..........................303
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................305
Changing the Wiper Blades......................305
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................306
Removing a Headlamp...............................307
4
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
Changing a Bulb...........................................307
Bulb Specification Chart.............................309
Changing the Engine Air Filter....................311
Vehicle Care
General Information......................................312
Cleaning Products.........................................312
Cleaning the Exterior....................................313
Waxing..............................................................314
Cleaning the Engine.....................................314
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades..........................................................315
Cleaning the Interior.....................................315
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................317
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................318
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................318
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels..........................318
Vehicle Storage.............................................319
Wheels and Tires
General Information.....................................322
Tire Care.........................................................324
Using Snow Chains......................................337
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............338
Changing a Road Wheel.............................342
Technical Specifications.............................349
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................351
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................352
Engine Specifications - 3.7L.......................353
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™...........354
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™...........356
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L.................................357
Vehicle Identification Number..................358
Vehicle Certification Label.........................358
Transmission Code Designation..............359
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™..................................................360
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................365
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........371
Audio System
General Information.....................................377
Audio Unit.......................................................378
USB Port..........................................................381
Media Hub.......................................................381
Accessories
Accessories...................................................382
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................384
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information...........387
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............391
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................395
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............399
Appendices
End User License Agreement....................419
5
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Table of Contents
6
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about your vehicle,
the greater the safety and pleasure you will
get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so they may appear different to you
on your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
7
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten seatbelt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
8
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Heated windshield
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company, Ford of
Canada, and service and repair facilities may
access or share among them vehicle
diagnostic information received through a
direct connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company, Ford
of Canada, and service and repair facilities
may access or share among them data for
vehicle improvement purposes. For U.S. only
(if equipped), if you choose to use the SYNC
9
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Vehicle Health Report, you consent that
certain diagnostic information may also be
accessed electronically by Ford Motor
Company and Ford authorized service
facilities, and that the diagnostic information
may be used for any purpose.
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
10
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature.
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNINGS
Some constituents of engine exhaust,
certain vehicle components, certain
fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Batteries also contain
other chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer. Wash your hands
after handling.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, safety belt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
11
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A great
way to know for sure you are getting this
level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Ford Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Ford Warranty.
12
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, refer to the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
You risk death or serious injury to
yourself and others if you do not follow
the instruction highlighted by the warning
symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger airbag.
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle’s On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
system has a data port for diagnostics, repair
and reprogramming services with diagnostic
scan tools. Installing a non-Ford-approved
aftermarket OBD plug-in device that uses
the port during normal driving, for example
remote insurance company monitoring,
remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or
engine reprogramming, may cause
interference or damage to vehicle systems.
We do not recommend or endorse the use
of any non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD
plug-in devices. The vehicle Warranty may
not cover damage caused by any
non-Ford-approved aftermarket OBD plug-in
device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
13
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for Export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
14
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
15
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Environment
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is secured
properly in a device that is appropriate
for their height, age and weight. Child safety
restraints must be bought separately from
your vehicle. Failure to follow these
instructions and guidelines may result in an
increased risk of serious injury or death to
your child.
WARNINGS
All children are shaped differently. The
recommendations for safety restraints
are based on probable child height, age and
weight thresholds from the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. We recommend
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure your
child seat is appropriate for your child, and
is compatible with and properly installed in
your vehicle. To locate a child seat fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
WARNINGS
Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371
or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat
Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain
children in safety seats made especially for
their height, age, and weight may result in
an increased risk of serious injury or death
to your child.
Do not leave children or animals
unattended in the vehicle. On hot days,
the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
16
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seat back upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
17
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80
pounds (36 kilograms). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 51).
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age
four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear seat
whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies and
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
18
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child seat and
the release button, to prevent accidental
unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• For second-row seating positions, adjust
the recliner slightly to improve child seat
fit. If needed, remove the head restraints.
• For third-row seating positions, stow the
head restraints to improve child seat fit.
See Head Restraints (page 133).
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated is a
forward facing child seat, the steps are the
same for installing a rear facing child seat.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
Standard seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
19
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until all of
the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
20
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will provide extra help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
21
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Inflatable seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions. Be
sure the belt webbing is not twisted.
22
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child seat for installation. The ability for
the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt will click as it retracts to indicate
it is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
23
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child seat to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 inch
(2.5 centimeters) of movement for
proper installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats to
the same anchor. In a crash, one
anchor may not be strong enough to hold
two child safety seat attachments and may
break, causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block access
to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies or
LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, occupants should only use seating
positions where they are able to be properly
restrained.
24
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where the seatback and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach
the child seat, however the seatbelt can still
be used to attach the child seat. For
forward-facing child seats, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor, if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child seat.
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating positions
marked with the child seat symbol.
Second-row bucket seats and third-row
passenger side
E190825
Second-row bench seats and third-row
passenger side
E190826
Second row bench seat (livery)
E211194
E144054
25
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the cushion
and seatback below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child seat manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child seat
with LATCH attachments.
Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center seating
position unless the child seat manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those in this
vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5
inches (52 centimeters) apart. The
standardized spacing for LATCH lower
anchors is 11 inches (28 centimeters) center
to center. A child seat with rigid LATCH
attachments cannot be installed at the center
seating position. LATCH compatible child
seats (with attachments on belt webbing) can
only be used at this seating position provided
that the child seat manufacturer’s instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child seat from side to side and forward
and back where it is secured to your vehicle.
The seat should move less than one inch
when you do this for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child seat
for information about ordering a tether strap,
or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether
strap on your safety seat does not reach the
appropriate top tether anchor in your vehicle.
26
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Once the child safety seat has been installed
using either the seatbelt, the lower anchors
of the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
Second row bucket seats and third row
passenger side
E190827
Second row bench seats and third row
passenger side
E190828
Second row bench seat (livery)
E210818
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child seat.
Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
E190829
27
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Placement of the tether strap
• Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seatback, under the head
restraint and between the head restraint
posts. If needed, remove the head
restraint to improve the fit of the child
safety seat or tether strap.
• Second row center seat positions: Route
the child safety seat tether strap over the
top of the head restraint. If needed,
remove the head restraint to improve the
fit of the child safety seat or tether strap.
See Head Restraints (page 133).
• Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the
seatback, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down to
improve the fit of the child safety seat or
tether strap. See Head Restraints (page
133).
1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be twisted
½ turn to improve installation. If the tether
strap is clipped incorrectly, the child
safety seat may not be retained properly
in the event of a crash.
E190833
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system is equipped with
a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, we also
recommend its use.
Second row bucket (40/40)
E190830
28
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Second row bench (60/40)
E190831
Second row bench seat (Livery)
E223334
29
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
1. You may need to move the load floor
rearward to gain access to the top tether
anchors.
2. After attaching the tether strap, reposition
the load floor.
Third row seat
E190832
Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable safety belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat back with knees bent
comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
30
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat back
or no head restraint, a backless booster seat
may place your child's head (as measured at
the tops of the ears) above the top of the
seat. In this case, move the backless booster
to another seating position with a higher seat
back or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
31
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
32
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon which
the child seat is installed all the way back.
When possible, all children age 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. If all children cannot be
seated and restrained properly in a rear
seating position, properly restrain the largest
child in the front seat.
WARNINGS
Always carefully follow the instructions
and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash, which may result
in serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Never use pillows, books, or towels to
boost a child. They can slide around
and increase the likelihood of injury or death
in a crash.
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of serious
injury.
Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
or behind the back because it reduces the
protection for the upper part of the body and
may increase the risk of injury or death in a
crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
33
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children
Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
Combined weight of
child and child seat
Restraint Type
Safety belt onlySafety belt and
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
Safety belt and top
tether anchor
LATCH (lower
anchors only)
LATCH (lower
anchors and top
tether anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
seat
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child seat
Note: The child seat must rest tightly against
the vehicle seat upon which it is installed. It
may be necessary to lift or remove the head
restraint. See Seats (page 133).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
34
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
35
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure
children sit where they can be properly
restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety
belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a safety belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the outside
shoulder only. Never wear the shoulder belt
under the arm. 2) Never swing the safety belt
around your neck over the inside shoulder.
3) Never use a single belt for more than one
person.
WARNINGS
When possible, all children 12 years old
and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position. Failure
to follow this could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become hot
in a vehicle that has been closed up in
sunny weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection in
an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder safety belts. All occupants of
the vehicle should always properly wear their
safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
36
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The safety belt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder safety belts.
• Shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety belt
and rear inflatable safety belt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front outboard
passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The safety belt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly
against the occupant’s body when activated.
This helps increase the effectiveness of the
safety belts. In frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners can be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you
securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
37
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the seatbelt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
seatbelt should fit snug and be positioned
low across the hips. The shoulder portion of
the seatbelt should be positioned across the
chest. Pregnant women should also follow
this practice. See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should be
positioned low across the hips below the
belly and worn as tight as comfort will allow.
The shoulder belt should be positioned to
cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Third Row Seatbelt Stowage
WARNING
Do not stow only one portion of the
shoulder belt in the stowage clip.
Wearing the shoulder belt in this condition
increases the amount of belt slack and may
reduce the effectiveness of the seatbelt in
the event of a crash.
E210819
To stow the seatbelt, grasp both portions of
the shoulder belt together in one hand and
slide them into the seatbelt stowage clip as
shown.
E210820
38
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Both the outer and inner shoulder belts must
be kept in the stowage clip together to
prevent the potential of wrinkling the cargo
shade.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the seatbelt
system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an authorized
dealer to verify that the automatic locking
retractor feature for child seats is still
functioning properly. In addition, all seatbelts
should be checked for proper function.
Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the seatbelt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other seatbelt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk of
injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard passenger
and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle
sensitive locking mode and the automatic
locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts will lock to help
reduce forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. If this
occurs, let the belt retract slightly and pull
webbing out again in a slow and controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed in
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Children 12 years old and under should be
properly restrained in a rear seating position
whenever possible. See Child Safety (page
16).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Non-inflatable seatbelts
39
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt
is now in the automatic locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second
row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull
upward until the entire belt is pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable seatbelt as
you could be seriously injured or killed.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child safety
car seats and belt positioning booster seats
when properly installed. This is because they
are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a
lower pressure and at a slower rate than
traditional airbags. After inflation, the
shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool
to the touch.
40
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The rear inflatable seatbelts are located in
the shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag located in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 55).
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
WARNING
If the rear inflatable seatbelt has
deployed, it will not function again. The
rear inflatable seatbelt system must be
replaced by an authorized dealer.
The rear inflatable seatbelts will function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body than
regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure
on the chest and helps control head and
neck motion for passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes and
some side impact crashes. The fact that the
rear inflatable seatbelt did not inflate in a
crash does not mean that something is
wrong with the system. Rather, it means the
forces were not of the type sufficient to
cause activation.
Stowing the Rear Inflatable Seatbelt
The rear inflatable seatbelt has a snap
retainer for stowing the seatbelt against the
quarter trim panel when it is not in use. This
will prevent the seatbelt tongue from rattling
against the side of the seat and keep it out
of the way when folding or tumbling the
second row seats.
41
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
E209845
Press the retainer on the seatbelt onto the
mating snap to stow. To use the seatbelt,
pull it away from the quarter trim panel.
Seatbelt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the torso.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable seatbelt.
Seatbelt extensions are vehicle-specific. See
an authorized dealer to make sure you obtain
the proper seatbelt extension for your
vehicle. Use only extensions manufactured
by the same supplier as the seatbelt. A
seatbelt extension is not available for the
inflatable seatbelt. Also, use the seatbelt
extension only if the seatbelt is too short for
you when fully extended.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height adjuster
so that the belt rests across the middle
of your shoulder. Failure to adjust the safety
belt properly could reduce the effectiveness
of the safety belt and increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
E209844
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the side release buttons and slide
the height adjuster up or down.
2. Release the buttons and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
42
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-2 minutes and the warning
chime sounds 4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled before the ignition switch is
turned to the on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver's safety belt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver's safety belt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
43
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
the system turning on the Belt-Minder feature
for objects you place on the front passenger
seat, only the front seat passengers receive
warnings as determined by the front
passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1–2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
44
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to switch
this feature off, the intent of the system
is to remind you to wear your safety belt to
improve your chance to survive an accident.
We recommend you leave the system
switched on for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Note: If you are using MyKey, you cannot
disable the Belt-Minder. Also, if you have
previously disabled the Belt-Minder, it will
be re-enabled during the use of MyKey. See
MyKey™ (page 63). .
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step 2,
wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 20 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts
to make sure there are no nicks, tears or
cuts. Replace if necessary. All vehicle safety
belt assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped),
shoulder belt guide on seat back (if
equipped), child safety seat LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions for
additional inspection and maintenance
information specific to the child restraint.
45
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
Ford Motor Company recommends that all
safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a crash be replaced. However, if
the crash was minor and an authorized
dealer finds that the belts do not show
damage and continue to operate properly,
they do not need to be replaced. Safety belt
assemblies not in use during a crash should
also be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 312).
46
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and safety belt
usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, safety belt pretensioners, front
safety belt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
safety belt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
47
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or gently,
and the risk of injury from a deploying
airbag is the greatest close to the trim
covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle, including
the driver, should always properly wear
their safety belts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.
Failure to properly wear your safety belt
could seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Always transport children 12 years old
and under in the back seat and always
properly use appropriate child restraints.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
Never place your arm over the airbag
module as a deploying airbag can
result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components get
hot after inflation. To reduce the risk
of injury, do not touch them after inflation.
If the airbag has deployed, the airbag
will not function again and must be
replaced immediately. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
48
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag inflation
area may cause those objects to be
propelled by the airbag into your face and
torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 55).
49
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 inches (25
centimeters) between an occupant’s chest
and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on safety belts, it is very important
that they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat back, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
50
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under should
be properly restrained in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take off weight from the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the front passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury or
death in a crash. Always sit upright against
your seatback, with your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger sensing
system which could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to
detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E224572
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that will
illuminate indicating that the front passenger
frontal airbag is either ON (enabled) or OFF
(disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps will illuminate
for a short period of time when the ignition
is first turned on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag and
seat-mounted side airbag when the
passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
OFF lamp and stay lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then turn the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
51
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator will illuminate the
ON lamp and remain illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag OFF indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seatback in the full upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This will allow the system to
detect that person and enable the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, the person should be advised
to ride in the rear seat.
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status indicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
52
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 55).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 261).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag cover,
on the side of the seatbacks (of the front
seats), or in front seat areas that may come
into contact with a deploying airbag. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not use accessory seat covers. The
use of accessory seat covers may
prevent the deployment of the side airbags
and increase the risk of injury in an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
side airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the seat
cover on a seat containing an airbag as you
could be seriously injured or killed. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The side
airbag system (including the seat) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury
in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the outboard
side of the seatbacks of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the airbag on the
side affected by the crash will be inflated.
The airbag was designed to inflate between
the door panel and occupant to further
enhance the protection provided occupants
in side impact crashes.
53
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver and
front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 55).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side
airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner at
the siderail that may come into contact with
a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
personal injury in the event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door. The
curtain airbag could injure you as it
deploys from the headliner.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the curtain airbags, its fuses,
the A, B, C or D pillar trim, or the headliner
on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as
you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
All occupants of your vehicle including
the driver should always wear their
safety belts even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system and curtain
airbag is provided. Failure to properly wear
your safety belt could seriously increase the
risk of injury or death.
To reduce risk of injury, do not obstruct
or place objects in the deployment
path of the curtain airbag.
If the curtain airbags have deployed,
the curtain airbags will not function
again. The curtain airbags (including the A,
B, C and D pillar trim and headliner) must be
inspected and serviced by an authorized
dealer. If the curtain airbag is not replaced,
the unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
54
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected by
the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy is
mounted to the roof side-rail sheet metal,
behind the headliner, above each row of
seats. In certain sideways crashes or rollover
events, the Safety Canopy will be activated,
regardless of which seats are occupied. The
Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between
the side window area and occupants to
further enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags located
above the trim panels over the front and
rear side windows identified by a label
or wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 55).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear
seats. The Safety Canopy will not interfere
with children restrained using a properly
installed child or booster seat because it is
designed to inflate downward from the
headliner above the doors along the side
window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to the
front end of the vehicle (including
frame, bumper, front end body structure and
tow hooks) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify the front end of the
vehicle.
55
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front safety belt pretensioners, driver
airbag, passenger airbag, seat mounted side
airbags, the Safety Canopy and rear
inflatable safety belts. Based on the type of
crash, the restraints control module will
deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or by a backup tone if the warning
light is not working. Routine maintenance of
the airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically until
the problem, the light or both are
repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and rear
inflatable safety belts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal, side and
rollover crashes.
56
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side crashes. Side airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes and
when a certain likelihood of rollover is
detected by the rollover sensor. The
Safety Canopy may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation, or a certain likelihood of
rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
57
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of the
following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of any exterior door
handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an
intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 59).
58
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E138616
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E142431
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle. Slide the release on the
back of the remote control to release the key
blade, then pull the blade out.
E138618
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or
equivalent.
1. Remove the key blade from the
transmitter.
E142432
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover. Do not use the key
blade to remove the cover or you could
damage it.
59
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
E138622
3. Remove the old battery.
4. Insert a new battery with the + facing
downward. Press the battery down to
make sure it is fully in the housing.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover onto
the transmitter and install the key blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
The horn sounds and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using the
panic alarm.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will
sound twice and the direction indicators will
not flash.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
Remote Start (If Equipped)
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The transmitter has an
extended operating range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control can
be configured to operate when the vehicle
is remote started. See Automatic Climate
Control (page 127).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch off the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon indicator was
on the last time your vehicle was driven.
60
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
The label on your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To start your vehicle remotely:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs the
blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 108).
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and the vehicle
runs for 5, 10 or 15 minutes, depending on
the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 10 minutes, the duration
extends by another 10 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 20
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps turn off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
to remotely switch off your vehicle after
remote starting. This is due to the added
noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
61
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Memory Feature
You can use the intelligent access key to
recall memory settings for the driver seat,
power mirrors, power steering column and
power adjustable foot pedals. Unlock your
vehicle with the intelligent access key to
recall the memory positions. You can
program the intelligent access key to recall
memory positions. See Memory Function
(page 138).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 79).
62
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be activated
with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. They can be used to:
• Create a MyKey.
• Program configurable MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey, you
can access the following information using
the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys are
programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder or safety belt reminder. You
cannot disable this feature. The audio
system will mute when the front seat
occupants’ safety belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low fuel warning is
activated earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on your
vehicle, are forced on: parking aid, blind
spot information system (BLIS), cross
traffic alert, lane departure warning and
forward collision warning system.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions
(available only in some markets).
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure certain
MyKey settings when you first create a
MyKey and before you recycle the key or
restart the vehicle. You can also change the
settings afterward with an admin key:
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display,
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or by
setting cruise control.
WARNING
Do not set MyKey maximum speed limit
to a limit that will prevent the driver
from maintaining a safe speed considering
posted speed limits and prevailing road
conditions. The driver is always responsible
to drive in accordance with local laws and
prevailing conditions. Failure to do so could
result in accident or injury.
63
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
• Various vehicle speed minders can be
set. Once you select a speed, it will be
shown in the display, followed by an
audible tone when the preselected
vehicle speed is exceeded.
• Audio system maximum volume of 45%.
A message will be shown in the display
when you attempt to exceed the limited
volume. Also, the speed-sensitive or
compensated automatic volume control
will be disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is selected,
you will not be able to turn off Advance
Trac or traction control, 911 Assist or
Emergency Assistance, or Do Not Disturb
(if your vehicle is equipped with these
features).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into the
ignition. If your vehicle is equipped with a
push-button start, place the key fob into the
backup slot. The location of your backup slot
is in another chapter. See Keyless Starting
(page 161).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to get
to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Create MyKey
When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings.
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or fob.
64
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
2. Access the main menu on the information
display controls. Use the arrow keys to
get to the following menu selections:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.Settings
Press the OK button or the right arrow key.MyKey
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear or change your MyKey settings
using the information display control on the
steering wheel. See Information Displays
(page 108).
Switch the ignition on using an admin key or
remote control.
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Press and hold the OK button until the following message displays.Clear MyKey
65
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Action and DescriptionMessage
All MyKeys
Cleared
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status.
66
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information on programmed
MyKey(s) using the information display
control on the steering wheel. See
Information Displays (page 108).
To find information on programmed MyKey(s), press the left arrow button to access the main menu and scroll to:
DescriptionMessage
Press the OK button.Settings
Press the OK button.MyKey
Select one of the following:
Tracks the distance when drivers use a MyKey. The only way to delete the accumulated distance
is by using an admin key to clear your MyKeys. If the distance does not accumulate as expected,
then the intended user is not using the MyKey, or an admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
MyKey Dist.
Indicates the number of MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to detect how many
MyKeys you have for your vehicle and determine when a MyKey has been deleted.
{0} MyKeys
Indicates how many admin keys are programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature to determine
how many unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey has
been programmed.
{0} Admin Keys
67
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
I cannot create a MyKey. • The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at
least one admin key).
• Vehicles with keyless start: The keyless start transmitter is not placed in the backup position.
See Starting a Gasoline Engine (page 162).
• SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
• The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
• The key or transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
Purchase a new key from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
68
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 79).I lost a key.
MyKey distances do not accumulate. • The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
• An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
• The key system has been reset.
• An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.
• No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 64).
No MyKey functions with the keyless
entry transmitter.
69
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. The direction
indicators will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door mode
unlocks all doors when you press the unlock
button once. The unlocking mode applies
to the remote control, keyless entry keypad
and intelligent access.
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
The direction indicators will flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors will lock again, the horn will sound and
the direction indicators will flash if all the
doors and the liftgate are closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or if
the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn will
sound twice and the direction indicators will
not flash.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with
the Key Blade
Locking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.
Unlocking with the Key
Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.
Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you only switch
off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.
70
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Activating Intelligent Access
The intelligent access key must be within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock
and open the door. Do not touch the lock
sensor on the front of the handle.
E185863
The locking sensors are on the front door
handles.
Touch the front of the door handle to lock
your vehicle. There is a brief delay before
you can unlock your vehicle again.
Note: Keep the door handle clean to make
sure the system operates correctly.
Note: Your vehicle does not automatically
lock. If you do not touch a locking sensor
your vehicle will remain unlocked.
At the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button on
the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. See
Power Liftgate (page 73).
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all of the doors will
immediately unlock and the horn will sound
twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
71
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front of
the door handle with another intelligent
access key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock
Autolock locks all the doors when all of the
following occur:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle attains a speed greater than
4 mph (7 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when all of
the following occur:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are closed
and your vehicle has been in motion at
a speed greater than 4 mph (7 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the accessory
position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: If you electronically lock your vehicle
after you switch the ignition off with the
driver door closed, the doors will not
autounlock.
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock
Note: You can switch autounlock and
autolock on or off independently of each
other.
To enable or disable autolock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in programming
mode.
6. Press the power door unlock control and
within five seconds, press the power door
lock control. The horn sounds once if
disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
To enable or disable autounlock, do the
following:
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
3. Switch the ignition off.
72
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
4. Press the power door unlock control
three times.
5. Switch the ignition on. The horn sounds
indicating your vehicle is in programming
mode.
6. Press the power door lock control and
within five seconds, press the power door
unlock control. The horn sounds once if
disabled or twice if enabled.
7. Switch the ignition off. The horn sounds
indicating programming is complete.
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Battery Saver for Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on and the
engine is not running, the battery saver will
turn the ignition off when it detects a certain
amount of battery drain, or after 45 minutes
have elapsed.
POWER LIFTGATE
WARNINGS
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
Make sure to close and latch the
liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust
fumes into your vehicle. This will also prevent
passengers and cargo from falling out. If you
must drive with the liftgate open, keep the
vents or windows open so outside air comes
into your vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
73
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
WARNINGS
Keep keys out of reach of children. Do
not allow children to operate or play
near an open or moving power liftgate. You
should supervise the operation of the power
liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.
Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).
Three warning tones sound as the liftgate
begins to power close. If there is a problem
with the open or close request, one of the
following may occur:
• One tone sounds if the ignition is on and
the transmission is not in park (P).
• Three tones sound if the battery voltage
is below the minimum operating voltage.
• One tone sounds if the vehicle speed is
at or above 3 mph (5 km/h).
If the liftgate starts to close after it has fully
opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a possible
gas strut failure. A repetitive tone sounds
and the liftgate closes under control. Remove
any excessive weight from the liftgate. If the
liftgate continues to close after opening,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Make sure all persons are clear of the
power liftgate area before using the
power liftgate control.
Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.
From the Instrument Panel
Press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control. If
an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.
74
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E211252
2. Press the liftgate release button hidden
above the license plate.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may turn on obstacle detection and
stop the power operation or reverse its
direction. Manually interfering with the
liftgate motion may also replicate a gas strut
failure.
Closing the Liftgate
WARNING
Keep clear of the liftgate when
activating the rear switch.
E211428
Press and release the button in the rear
cargo area.
75
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
Stopping the Liftgate Movement
You can stop the liftgate movement by doing
any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the remote
control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Activating the obstacle detection feature.
Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate by pressing the control
button on the liftgate when it reaches the
desired height.
Note: When the liftgate has stopped moving,
you can also manually move it to the desired
height.
3. Press and hold the liftgate control button
on the liftgate until a tone sounds,
indicating programming is complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.
Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.
The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the power
liftgate, you can manually move it to a
different height.
Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height, even if you disconnect
the battery.
When operating the power liftgate after you
have programmed a lower height than fully
open, you can fully open the liftgate by
manually pushing it upward to the maximum
open position.
Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. Three tones sound and the system
reverses to open. When you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.
Note: Entering your vehicle when the liftgate
is closing can activate obstacle detection.
To prevent this, allow the power liftgate to
fully close before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.
When Opening
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and two short tones sound. When
you remove the obstacle, you can continue
to operate the liftgate.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.
76
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
E138637
You can use the keypad to do the following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
• Recall memory seat and mirror positions.
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner’ s wallet card in the glove box
and is available from an authorized dealer.
You can also program up to five of your own
five-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat steps 1 through 3, then for step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions (If Equipped)
The programmed entry codes recall driver
memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 recalls driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 recalls driver 2 memory
positions.
• Entry code 3 recalls driver 3 memory
positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will not
recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
77
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times. This
mode turns off the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any of
the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.
Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 70).
78
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in engine
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may result in vehicle starting problems,
especially if they are too close to the key
when starting your vehicle. Prevent these
objects from touching the coded key when
starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition off,
move all objects on the key chain away from
the coded key and restart your vehicle if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock®
The system helps prevent the engine from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
coded key, it is not operating correctly. A
message may appear in the information
display.
Automatic Arming
The system arms when you switch the
ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
The system disarms when you switch the
ignition on with a coded key.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes with two keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and turns on the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your coded keys are lost or stolen and you
do not have an extra coded key, you need
to erase the key codes from your vehicle and
program new coded keys. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Store a spare intelligent access key away
from your vehicle in a safe place. You can
purchase replacement keys or remote
controls from an authorized dealer.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access keys readily accessible. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
79
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Security
Make sure that the ignition is switched off
before beginning this procedure. Make sure
that you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Carry out all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you carry out any steps out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. Press the push button ignition switch.
4. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
5. Remove the intelligent access key.
6. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot and press the push button
ignition switch.
7. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
8. Remove the intelligent access key.
9. Wait five seconds, then place the
unprogrammed intelligent access key in
the backup slot and press the push
button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Check that
the remote control functions operate and
your vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
80
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Security
If programming was unsuccessful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If
programming remains unsuccessful, contact
an authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
81
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 133).
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel when
your vehicle is moving.
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
The steering column may begin to move
again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for an
additional few seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position is set. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
will stop just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 138).
Note: Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the steering
column will move to allow extra room to exit
your vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the ignition
on. You can enable or disable this feature in
the information display. See Information
Displays (page 108).
82
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL (If Equipped)
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
E173608
Seek up and down or next.A
Media.B
Volume up or down.C
Mute.D
MEDIA
Press repeatedly to scroll through available
audio modes.
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E173609
V
Phone mode.A
Voice recognition.B
See your SYNC information.
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E173610
83
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS
WARNING
Never use the controls while your feet
are on the accelerator and brake
pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.
A B
E162916
A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 138).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).
85
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Pedals
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 305).
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
E208496
Rotate the end of the control:
• Away from you to increase the wiper
speed.
• Toward you to decrease the wiper speed.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
AUTOWIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades
if they begin to leave streaks or smears. If
that does not resolve the issue, install new
wiper blades. See Changing the Wiper
Blades (page 305).
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing. In these conditions, you can do
the following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor,
located in the area around the interior mirror.
The rain sensor monitors the amount of
moisture on the windshield and automatically
turns on the wipers. It adjusts the wiper
speed by the amount of moisture that the
sensor detects on the windshield.
Note: This autowiper feature is automatically
set to on and remains on until you switch it
off in the information display. You can also
switch the feature back on at any time. See
General Information (page 108).
86
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
E208496
Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor. Set the control to low
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on when
the rain sensor detects a large amount of
moisture on the windshield. Set the control
to high sensitivity, and the wipers will turn
on when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.
Note: When you set the wiper system to
intermittent wipe and the autowiper system
is on, the autowiper sensitivity setting adjusts
the wiper speed according to the moisture
on the windshield only. Use the wiper lever
to wipe the windshield on-demand.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the windshield
washers before wiping a dry windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E208497
Press the end of the wiper lever to activate
the washer:
• A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
• A quick press and hold causes the wipers
to swipe the windshield three times with
washer fluid.
• A long press and hold activates the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You can
switch this feature on and off through the
information display. See General
Information (page 108).
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS
Rear Window Wiper
Note: Make sure you switch off the wiper
system before using an automatic car wash.
87
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
E208498
Rotate the control to select:
Intermittent operation - the
shortest pause between wipes.
2
Intermittent operation - the
longest pause between wipes.
1
Off.0
Rear Window Washer
E208498
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to activate the rear washer.
The control returns to the 2 or 0 position
when you release it.
Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the rear washer also operates the
rear camera washer.
88
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in Lamp Assemblies
Exterior lamps have vents to accommodate
normal changes in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E224599
A
Off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
B
Headlamps.C
89
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
High Beams
E167827
Push the lever away from you to switch the
high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
Headlamp Flasher
E163268
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING
The autolamps switch position may not
activate the headlamps in all low
visibility conditions, such as daytime fog.
Make sure the headlamps are switched to
auto or on, as appropriate, during all low
visibility conditions. Failure to do so may
result in a crash.
E224686
A
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps automatically turn
on in low light situations or when the wipers
activate.
If equipped, the following also activate when
the lighting control is in the autolamps
position and you switch them on in the
information display:
• Configurable daytime running lamps.
• Automatic high beam control.
• Adaptive headlamp control.
90
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use the
information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on. See Information Displays (page 108).
Note: With the headlamps in the autolamps
position, you cannot switch the high beam
headlamps on until the autolamps system
turns the low beam headlamps on.
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
The windshield wiper activated headlamps
turn on within 10 seconds when you switch
the windshield wipers on and the lighting
control is in the autolamps position. They
turn off approximately 60 seconds after you
switch the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on by wiper
activation:
• During a mist wipe.
• When the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps will
automatically turn on when the windshield
wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
E163270
Use to adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel and all applicable lit
components in the vehicle during headlamp
and parking lamp operation.
• Tap the top or bottom of the control to
brighten/dim all interior lit components
incrementally, or
• Press and hold at the first position the
top or bottom of the control until the
desired lighting level is reached.
• Press and hold the top of the control to
the full on position to activate the “dome
on” feature. This will turn on the interior
courtesy lights. The lights will remain on
until the bottom of the control is pressed.
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
You can set the delay time to keep the
headlamps on for up to three minutes after
you switch off the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the delay
time (Steps 1 to 6 must be completed within
10 seconds):
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
3. Turn the lighting control to the off
position.
91
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn on.
7. Turn the lighting control to the off
position when the required delay time
has been reached. The headlamps and
parking lamps will turn off.
You can set the headlamp exit delay to one
of the following settings:
• Off
• 10 seconds
• 20 seconds
• 120 seconds
Note: You can adjust the time delay using
the display controls in the instrument cluster.
See Information Displays (page 108).
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations or
during inclement weather. The system does
not activate the tail lamps and may not
provide adequate lighting during these
conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may result
in a collision.
The system switches the signature lamps on
in day light conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the ignition
on, and switch the lighting control to the off,
autolamp, or parking lamp position.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no other
traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the tail
lamps of the preceding vehicle or street
lighting, the system will turn off the high
beams before they distract other drivers. The
low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control of
the high beams is not functioning properly,
check the windshield in front of the camera
for a blockage. A clear view of the road is
required for proper system operation. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera’s field-of-view repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage such
as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow or ice,
and you do not observe changes, the system
will go into low beam mode until you clear
the blockage. A message may also appear
in the instrument cluster display noting the
front camera is blocked.
92
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water spots
will not affect the performance of the
automatic high beam system. However, in
cold or inclement weather conditions, you
will notice a decrease in the availability of
the high beam system, especially at start up.
If you want to change the beam state
independently of the automatic control, you
may switch the high beams on or off using
the lever. Automatic control will resume
when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride height
such as using much larger tires, may
degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to decide when to turn
the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of the vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 32 mph
(52 km/h).
The high beams will turn off if:
• The system detects the headlamps of an
approaching vehicle or the tail lamps of
a preceding vehicle.
• Vehicle speed falls below 27 mph
(44 km/h).
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 108).
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position. See Autolamps (page 90).
Manually Overriding the System
E167827
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the stalk
will provide a temporary override to low
beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or switch
the lighting control from autolamps to
headlamps.
93
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
FRONT FOG LAMPS
E224852
A
Pull the lighting control toward you to switch
the fog lamps on.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except off
and the high beam is not on.
HEADLAMP LEVELING
This vehicle is equipped with a dynamic
automatic leveling system. The headlamps
do not require additional aim adjustment.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (If Equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position.
94
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When your start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E163272
• To operate the left-hand direction
indicator, push the lever down until it
stops.
• To operate the right-hand direction
indicator, push the lever up until it stops.
• To manually cancel direction indicator
operation, push the lever again in either
direction.
Lane Change
To indicate a left or right lane change:
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and release. The direction
indicator will flash three times and stop.
• Push the lever up or down to the first
stop position and hold. The direction
indicator will flash for as long as you hold
the lever in this position.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They will project an image onto
the ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat will turn on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors have
been automatically folded in upon locking
or using the switch on the door.
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in manually to the door
window glass, then the welcome mats will
not turn on.
95
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when you have met
one of the following conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the outer edge of the clear
lens on the front row map lamp.
Front Row Map Lamps
E166237
To switch on the map lamps, press the outer
edge of the clear lens.
The front row map lamp will automatically
turn on when:
• Any door is opened.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
Second Row Map Lamps
E173272
The second row lamps light when:
• Any door is open.
• You press and hold the top of the
instrument lighting dimmer switch past
the first detent.
• You press any of the remote entry
controls and the ignition is in the off
position.
Press the lamp lens to activate the reading
lamps.
AMBIENT LIGHTING
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.
96
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may seriously
injure themselves.
When closing the power windows, you
should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the window
openings.
E163056
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the control fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will automatically stop and
reverse some distance if it detects an
obstacle while closing.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature the window will not reverse if
it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window closes fully.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
97
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Accessory Delay
The window switches remain operational for
several minutes when you switch the ignition
off or until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 108).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows and vent the
moonroof. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or unlock
button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they are
free of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust your mirrors:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust the
position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.
98
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
131).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 138).
Auto-dimming Feature
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
with the auto-dimming interior mirror.
Direction Indicator Mirrors
While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.
Puddle Lamps
The lamps on the bottom part of the mirror
housing light when you use your transmitter
to unlock the doors or when you open a
door.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. They can assist you
by increasing visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you are going
to change lanes. Glance over your shoulder
to verify traffic is clear, and carefully change
lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
99
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions
from the main mirror and begins to appear
in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Information System (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
221).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
Second Row Illuminated Vanity Mirror
(If Equipped)
E210723
Pull the cover down to turn on the lamp.
SUN VISORS
E138666
100
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended in
the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
WARNINGS
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children and
pets are not in the proximity of the roof
opening.
Note: Do not attempt to move the sunshades
manually or sunshade damage or
malfunction may occur. The sunshade track
clips are designed to release the sunshade
crossbar in order to prevent damage to the
system. If this happens, you may need to
slide the sunshade crossbar ends back into
position to regain proper function. Contact
an authorized dealer for proper moonroof
or sunshade operating, diagnostic or repair
instructions.
Note: If the moonroof is excessively
operated, the glass and shade motors go
into a fail-safe jog mode. This mode allows
manual intermittent operation to prevent
overheating or damage to the motor. The
motors return to normal operation after a
period of idle time.
The moonroof and sunshade controls are on
the overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. There is only one
control in the center position if the vehicle
has a fixed glass roof. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening the Sunshade and Moonroof
Note: The moonroof only opens after the
sunshades completely open.
E210724
Press and release the control to open the
sunshade. The front and rear sunshades
open simultaneously.
Press and release the control to open the
moonroof. The moonroof stops short of the
fully opened position.
101
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the moonroof.
Closing the Moonroof and Sunshades
Note: The sunshades only close after the
moonroof completely closes.
E210724
Pull and release the control. The moonroof
stops short of the fully closed position. Pull
the control again and hold to fully close the
moonroof.
Pull and release the control to close the
sunshades. The sunshades stop short of the
fully closed position. Pull the control again
and hold to fully close the sunshades.
Venting the Moonroof (If Equipped)
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT control
to close the moonroof.
102
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Windows and Mirrors
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
will alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps will illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 207).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned on.
Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Airbag Readiness
If this light fails to illuminate when
you switch the ignition on,
continues to flash or remains on, it
indicates a malfunction. Have the system
checked by your authorized dealer. A tone
sounds when there is a malfunction.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp
is also illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
Brake System Warning Light
E144522
It will illuminate when you engage
the parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If the
parking brake is not engaged, this indicates
low brake fluid level or a brake system
malfunction. Have the system checked
immediately by your authorized dealer.
104
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may occur.
It will take you longer to stop your vehicle.
Have your vehicle checked by your
authorized dealer immediately. Driving
extended distances with the parking brake
engaged can cause brake failure and the risk
of personal injury.
Charging System
Illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly.
If it stays on when the engine is
running, there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a
problem with the electrical system or a
related component.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in:
• On (gray light): Illuminates when you
switch the speed control system on.
Turns off when you switch the speed
control system off.
• Engaged (white light): Illuminates when
you engage the speed control system.
Turns off when you disengage the speed
control.
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 307).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 296).
Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the engine
oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).
Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by your authorized
dealer immediately.
Fasten Seatbelt
It will illuminate and a chime will
sound to remind you to fasten your
seatbelt. See Seatbelt Reminder
(page 44).
105
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
Front Fog Lamps
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.
Head Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It will also illuminate momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.
High Beam
It will illuminate when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
will flash when you use the
headlamp flasher.
Liftgate Ajar
E162453
Illuminates when you do not
completely close the liftgate.
Low Fuel Level
It will illuminate when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning
It will illuminate when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It will also illuminate momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
It will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
It will illuminate when you switch
the parking lamps on.
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced
Power
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon indicator
light stays illuminated after the
engine is started, it indicates that
the On Board Diagnostics system (OBD) has
detected a malfunction of the vehicle
emissions control system. Refer to On board
diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling
chapter for more information about having
your vehicle serviced. See Emission Control
System (page 173).
106
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
If the light is blinking, engine misfire is
occurring which could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid
heavy acceleration and deceleration) and
have your vehicle serviced immediately.
WARNING
Under engine misfire conditions,
excessive exhaust temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter, the fuel
system, interior floor coverings or other
vehicle components, possibly causing a fire.
Have an authorized dealer service your
vehicle immediately.
The service engine soon indicator light
illuminates when the ignition is first turned
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light will
stay on until the engine is cranked, then turn
itself off if no malfunctions are present.
However, if after 15 seconds the service
engine soon light blinks eight times, it means
that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
See Emission Control System (page 173).
Stability Control
E138639
It will flash when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 195).
Stability Control Off
It will illuminate when you switch
the system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on or
when you switch the ignition off. See Using
Stability Control (page 195).
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
107
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A check
in the box indicates the feature is
enabled, and unchecked indicates the
feature is disabled.
Information Display Controls
E216192
108
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
• Display Mode
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Display Mode
XXX mi (km) to empty, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 1
Round tachometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 2
Round tachometer, Engine coolant temp gauge, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 3
Digital speedometer, Fuel gauge and Total odometerOption 4
Regardless of display mode chosen, when you use the SelectShift Automatic™ transmission (SST), the cluster will change to the round
tachometer if not already selected.
109
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
XXX mi (km) to empty
Shows approximate fuel level before the fuel
tank reaches empty. The value is dynamic
and can change (raise or lower) depending
on driving style.
Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge will
indicate approximately how much fuel is in
the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door side
of your vehicle. When the fuel level becomes
low, the level indicator will change to amber.
When the fuel level becomes critically low,
the level indicator will change to red.
Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.
Note: When a MyKey® is in use, low fuel
warnings will display earlier.
Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear will appear in the
display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
Trip 1 & 2
Choose between the following trip displays.
Trip 1 & 2
Trip distance
Average fuel economy
Elapsed trip time
Hold OK to Reset
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed trip information.
110
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Trip distance
Shows the accumulated trip distance.
Average fuel economy
Shows the average fuel economy for a given
trip.
Elapsed trip time
When you switch off your vehicle the timer
stops and restarts when you restart your
vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
XX. Min Fuel HistoryInst. Fuel EconomyFuel Economy
XInstantaneous fuel usage
XFuel usage over a 30 minute time span
Always PresentAverage fuel economy
XXX mi (km) to empty
Total odometer (lower left corner)
Press and hold the OK to reset the currently displayed fuel usage information.
Note: Press and hold OK to reset the
currently displayed fuel usage information.
Inst Fuel Economy
This display shows a visual graph of your
instantaneous fuel economy.
30 Min Fuel History
This display shows a bar chart of your fuel
history.
Driver Assist
Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between the following display options.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
111
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
High, Normal or LowSensitivityCollision Warn
Cross Traffic
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Front Park Aid
Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
112
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Normal or TowingDTE CalculationVehicle
Easy Entry / Exit
Right Hand or Left Hand TrafficTraffic Set UpAdaptive Head LampsLighting
On or OffAuto Highbeam
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlocking
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life Reset
Auto or Last SettingsEnable / DisablePower Liftgate
Auto Heated or OffClimate ControlRemote Start
5, 10 or 15 minutesFront Seats
Duration
System
Remote OpenWindows
113
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Remote Close
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
MyKeys and Admin KeysMykey StatusMyKey
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKey
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Traction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Speed Minder
On or OffVolume Limiter
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
On or OffMyKey Report
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & GAL, l/100km or km/lDistanceDisplay Settings
114
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Fuel Gauge or Fuel + TachGauge Display
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage
Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)Temperature
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if
a MyKey is set.
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E173229
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
115
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 207).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 207).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in
front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive Cruise
Control (page 207).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
The traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On
Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway.Trailer Sway Reduce Speed
116
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key
on the driver's side door. In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering, the
ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires. See Anti-Theft Alarm
(page 81).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
The engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
The engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy
The engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering wheel button to
override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to Override
117
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
AWD
ActionMessage
The all-wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself due to the system overheating or
you are using the spare tire. The all-wheel drive system will resume normal function and clear
this message after cycling the ignition and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed
or after the system cools.
AWD OFF
Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control / Transmission / AWD light when the AWD
system is not operating properly. See Warning Lamps and Indicators (page 104). If the warning
stays illuminated or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check AWD
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
The battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn
the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear once the vehicle
has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary electrical
loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Transport Mode Contact Dealer
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Factory Mode Contact Dealer
118
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Blindspot System Fault
The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 221).
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 221).Vehicle Coming From X
The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 221).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Cross Traffic System Fault
Brake System
ActionMessage
The brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 302).
Brake Fluid Level Low
The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.Check Brake System
The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive your vehicle more than 3 mph (5
km/h). If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Park Brake Engaged
119
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Malfunction
The collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather
or ice/mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. Contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
There is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will be disabled.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not Available
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
The door listed is not completely closed.X Door Ajar
The luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
The driver’s door is opened, your vehicle is in park and the engine is on.Engine ON
120
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Fuel
ActionMessage
An early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.To START Press Brake
The key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 161).No Key Detected
The Start Stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not
detected inside your vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Your vehicle is in the accessory ignition state.Accessory Power is Active
There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See an authorized dealer for service.Starting System Fault
During spare key programming, an intelligent access key is programmed to the system.Key Programmed x Keys Total
During spare key programming, the maximum number of keys have been programmed.Max Number of Keys Learned
121
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).Change Engine Oil Soon
The oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).Oil Change Required
122
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over Temperature
The washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
There is a malfunction with one of the features that is a part of your drive control system. See
an authorized dealer.
Drive Control Malfunction Service Required
Displays when the steering system needs service. See your authorized dealer.Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system has disabled power steering assist due to a system error. See your
authorized dealer.
Power Steering Assist Fault
MyKey
ActionMessage
MyKey cannot be programmed during key programming .MyKey not Created
MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your vehicle speed is approaching 80
mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
123
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a
preselected speed.
Check Speed Drive Safely
A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
An attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled. See Rear Parking
Aid (page 197).
Check Park Aid
Displayed when the transmission is in R (Reverse) and the park aid is disabled. See Rear Parking
Aid (page 197).
Check Rear Park Aid
The park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
124
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See an authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle a safe place. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Service Power Steering Now
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
Seats
ActionMessage
Objects are by the passenger seat. After the objects are moved away from the seat, if the warning
stays on or continues to come on contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
125
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 338).
Tire Pressure Low
The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact an authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 338).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. For more information on
how the system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
338). If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using Traction Control (page 192).Traction Control Off
Transmission
ActionMessage
You switched the engine off and shift select lever is in any position other than P (Park).Shift to Park
126
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
E173267
MY TEMP: Adjust the temperature setting on the driver side. This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when you
switch off dual zone mode.
A
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.B
DUAL: Adjust the temperature setting on the passenger side.C
127
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Recirculated air: Press to switch between outside air and recirculated air. The air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.
This can reduce the time needed to cool the interior and reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle.
D
Note: Recirculated air may also turn on and off automatically in instrument panel or instrument panel and floor airflow modes during
hot weather to improve cooling efficiency.
MAX A/C: Adjust for maximum cooling. Recirculated air flows through the instrument panel vents, air conditioning automatically
turns on and the fan automatically adjusts to the highest speed.
E
A/C: Press to switch the air conditioning on or off. Air conditioning cools your vehicle using outside air. To improve the time to reach
a comfortable temperature in hot weather, drive with the windows open until you feel cold air through the air vents.
F
Note: In certain conditions (for example, maximum defrost), the air conditioning compressor may continue to operate even though
the air conditioning is switched off.
Power: Press to switch the system on and off. When the system is off, it prevents outside air from entering the vehicle.G
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature. Fan speed, air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and outside or recirculated air are automatically adjusted to heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the desired temperature.
You can also switch off dual zone mode by pressing and holding for more than two seconds.
H
Heated rear window: Press to switch the heated rear window on and off. See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 131).I
Defrost: Select to distribute air through the windshield air vents. Air distribution to the instrument panel and footwell vents turns
off. You can also use this setting to defrost and clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
J
128
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary. The system automatically adjusts
to heat or cool the cabin to your selected
temperature as quickly as possible. For the
system to function efficiently, the instrument
panel and side air vents should be fully
open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot outside
temperatures, or when the inside of the
vehicle is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
When the interior reaches the selected
temperature, the system automatically
switches to using outside air.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Select the MAX A/C function.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Select the AUTO function.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
129
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS
E211629
Fan speed control: Adjust the volume of air circulated in the vehicle.A
Heated seats: Press to switch the heated seats on and off. See Seats (page 133).B
130
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Air distribution control: Adjust to turn airflow from the instrument panel or footwell vents on or off. You can distribute air through
any combination of these vents.
C
Temperature control: Control the temperature of the air circulated in your vehicle.D
Climate controlled seats: Press to switch the climate controlled seats on and off. See Seats (page 133).E
AUTO: Press to switch on automatic operation. Adjust to select the desired temperature.F
Fan speed control lock: When illuminated, you can only operate the rear passenger settings through the front controls.G
HEATED WINDOWS AND MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.
E184884
Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice and
fog. The heated rear window will
automatically turn off after a short period of
time. Start the engine before you switch the
heated rear window on.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean or remove decals from the
inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped)
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors will
automatically turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the
glove box.
131
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 387).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see an authorized dealer.
REMOTE START
The remote start feature allows you to
pre-condition the interior of your vehicle. The
climate control system works to achieve
comfort according to your pre-selected
settings.
Note: You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. You cannot switch
on the displays or indicators during remote
start.
Switch the ignition on to return the system
to its pre-selected settings. You can now
make adjustments normally, but you need to
switch certain vehicle-dependent features
back on, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
You can adjust the default remote start
settings using the information display
controls. See Information Displays (page
108).
Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either heats
or cools (based on pre-selected settings).
The rear defroster, heated mirrors and
heated seats do not automatically switch on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats and heated steering
wheel are set to high (if available, and
selected to AUTO in the information display).
The rear defroster and heated mirrors
automatically switch on.
132
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seatback reclined too far can
take weight off the seat cushion and affect
the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
Do not recline the seatback as this can
cause the occupant to slide under the
safety belt, resulting in serious injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seatback to reduce the risk of serious
injury in the event of a crash or during heavy
braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle. This
will help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash. Do not adjust the head
restraint when your vehicle is moving.
133
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied. An improperly adjusted
head restraint may provide reduced
protection to an occupant during certain rear
impacts
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury in
the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat head restraints
E138642
Second-row center seat head restraint (If
equipped)
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.
C
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
134
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second-row outboard seat head restraints
E162872
A
C
B
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Guide sleeve unlock and remove
buttons.
C
The outboard head restraints are
non-adjustable, but they can be removed.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold the C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Third-row head restraints (if equipped)
E190836
The head restraints consist of:
An energy absorbing head
restraint.
A
Two steel stems.B
Fold strap.C
Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head restraint
back up to reset.
Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to automatically fold the
head restraint.
Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped)
The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort.
To tilt the head restraint, do the following:
135
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward
again will then release it to the rearward,
un-tilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the driver seat or
seatback when your vehicle is moving.
Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle
is in motion may cause loss of control of your
vehicle.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
136
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E210821
137
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Power Lumbar (Limo/Livery)
E138648
Four Way Power Lumbar (If Equipped)
The lumbar control is located on the side of
the seat cushion.
E210822
Press the front or rear of the control to adjust
firmness or softness.
Press the top or bottom of the control to raise
or lower the height of the lumbar support.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of obstructions
and that all occupants are clear of moving
parts.
WARNINGS
Do not use the memory function when
your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Optional power steering column.
• Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
The memory control is located on the driver
door.
E142554
138
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset button
until you hear a single tone.
You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features move to the position
stored for that preset.
You can recall a programmed memory
position:
• Only in park (P) or neutral (N) if the
ignition is on.
• In any gearshift position if the ignition is
not on.
You can also recall a programmed memory
position by:
• Pressing your remote control transmitter
unlock button (if the remote control is
programmed to a memory position).
• Unlocking your vehicle with an intelligent
access key (if it is programmed to a
memory position).
• Entering a programmed personal entry
code on the Securicode keypad. See
Locks (page 70).
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about five seconds. A tone sounds
after about two seconds. Continue
holding until you hear a second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 3, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature (If Equipped)
This feature adjusts the position of the seat
and steering column to allow easier exit and
entry to the vehicle.
The driver seat automatically moves 2 inches
(5 centimeters) rearward when the
transmission is in park (P) and you remove
the key from the ignition or you switch the
ignition off.
The driver seat and steering wheel return to
their previous positions when you put the
key in the ignition or switch the ignition on.
139
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 108).
REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
Second Row Seats
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
Reclining the seatback can cause an
occupant to slide under the seatbelt,
resulting in severe personal injuries in the
event of a crash.
Recline Adjustment
E209847
Note: For the bench seat only, make sure
the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. You can also fold the
seatback forward until it is flat. For the Town
Car livery version only, the seatback cannot
be folded flat or tumbled forward.
Moving the Seats Backward and Forward
(Six-Passenger Vehicles Only)
E190838
Second-Row Power Lumbar Support
(Six-Passenger Vehicles Only)
The power lumbar control is on the outboard
side of the seat.
140
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E210823
Press the top of the control to adjust
firmness. Press the bottom of the control to
adjust softness.
Moving the Front Passenger Seat Backward
and Forward (Town Car Livery)
E210824
Press the control on the passenger side rear
door to move the front passenger seat
backward and forward.
Power Fold and Tumble Seat (If Equipped)
WARNING
Make sure that the seat is unoccupied
when folding it down. Folding the seat
while occupied could result in occupant
injury or damage to the seat.
This feature is available for the right-hand
seat on seven-passenger vehicles and on
both sides for six-passenger vehicles.
E190848
The control is located at the back of the rear
door opening. Press it to fold the seatback
down and tumble the seat forward for access
to the third row.
141
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Note: When you turn the ignition off, the
power fold feature works until the battery
saver turns it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Locks (page 70).
Keep the key in the accessory or run position
to prevent the feature from timing out.
Rear Seat Armrest (Livery vehicle)
WARNING
Use only soft cups in the cupholder.
Hard objects can injure you in a crash.
E210825
To access the cupholders, rotate the armrest
into the use position. To open the storage
compartment, pull the cupholder latch
forward.
Third Row Seats (Accessing the Seat)
WARNINGS
Before returning the seatback to its
original position, make sure that cargo
or any objects are not trapped behind the
seatback. After returning the seatback to its
original position, pull on the seatback to
make sure that it has fully latched. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous in
the event of a sudden stop or crash.
Do not adjust or release the seat floor
latch while vehicle is in motion. Do not
operate the vehicle with seats in the tumbled
position. Always latch the vehicle seat to the
floor, whether the seat is occupied or empty.
If not latched or if the seat is tumbled, the
seat may cause injury during a sudden stop.
Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.
Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row.
E209848
142
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
1. Lift the handle located on the side of the
seat. The seatback will fold flat.
E190844
2. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the third
row. Note: The seatback must be folded
flat in order to release the floor latches.
Make sure that there are no objects on
the seat cushion that may restrict the
seatback from folding flat.
E190845
3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209849
4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position.
Note: The seatback will not raise if the rear
latch hooks are not properly engaged to the
floor striker. If the seatback does not raise,
then repeat Step 4.
Third Row Seat Exit
E209850
143
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
1. Pull on the strap located on the back of
the second row seat. This will fold the
seatback forward. Pull the strap a second
time to tumble the seat forward, allowing
easy exit from the third row seat. Note:
The seatback must be folded flat in order
to release the floor latches. Make sure
that there are no objects on the seat
cushion that may restrict the seatback
from folding flat.
E190850
2. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.
E209849
3. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until you
hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then repeat
steps 3 and 4.
E190847
4. Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.
Stowing the Third Row Seat
Note: Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub. Objects in the seat or stowage
tub may cause serious damage to the seat
upholstery and cause improper seat function.
144
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E210069
1. From the rear of the vehicle, stow the
head restraints by pulling the strap
located on the middle of the seatback
just below the head restraint. Then fold
the seatback by pulling and holding the
red strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release the strap once the
seatback starts rotating forward.
E209852
2. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on the
strap located at the top of the seatback.
This will tumble the seat all the way into
the floor tub.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.
E209853
Note: Do not use the third row seat back as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Sharp objects may result in damage to seat
upholstery.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.
Unstowing the Third Row Seat
WARNING
Make sure the seat is latched to vehicle
floor by pushing and pulling on the
seat. If not latched, the seat may cause injury
during a sudden stop.
145
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or brief cases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the load
floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: Make sure the area under the forward
portion of the load floor is free of objects
before unstowing the third row seat.
E209854
1. Unlatch and lift the seat out of the floor
tub by squeezing and pulling up on the
handle. Once the seat is at a vertical
position, push the seat over, letting it fall
onto the latches.
E209852
2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then, while
holding the red strap, pull the long strap
located on the seatback to raise the
seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their normal
positions.
PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If equipped)
The third row seat features a power
one-touch operation that allows you to adjust
the left, right, or both seats into a NORMAL,
STOW, FOLD, or TAILGATE position with just
one touch of a button.
Note: The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
tailgate is open. If the ignition is off and the
feature is still running, the battery saver will
turn it off after 10 minutes. You can
reactivate the power seats by pressing the
unlock button on the remote entry key fob
or by using the unlock procedure on the
keyless entry keypad. See Keyless Entry
(page 76). Keep the key in the accessory or
run position to prevent the feature from
timing out.
The third row power seat buttons are located
behind the third row seats on the left-hand
quarter trim panel.
146
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
E209855
Press to return the seat to the normal seating position.A
Press to stow the seat into the tub floor.B
Press the top of the button to fold down the seatback. Press the bottom portion of the button to put the seat into the tailgate positionC
Press to select either right-hand seat, the left-hand seat or both.D
Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.
147
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the load
floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.
Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third row
power seat stops prematurely or travels to
an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle when the third
row seat is rotated backwards. During
a sudden stop, the seatbelts are not
functional in this position and the third row
seat can rapidly tip back to the forward
position, all of which may result in serious
injury.
E209856
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
148
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Second-Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the seat heater. The seat heater may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion, because this may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Do not puncture the seat
with pins, needles, or other pointed objects
because this may damage the heating
element which may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
149
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain to
their skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury,
medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other
physical conditions, must exercise care when
using the heated seat. The heated seat may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or
cushion. This may cause the heated seat to
overheat. Do not puncture the seat with pins,
needles or other pointed objects. This may
damage the heating element which may
cause the heated seat to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious personal
injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
Note: You must switch the ignition on to use
this feature.
E146309
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
Second-Row Climate Controlled Seats (If
Equipped)
The controls for the second-row climate
controlled seats are on the rear of the floor
console. They function the same as the
front-row climate controlled seats.
150
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes
air filters. You must replace them periodically.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 387).
There is a filter under each front seat. Access
the filter from the second row footwell area.
Move the front seats all the way to the full
front and full up positions to ease access.
E146319
To remove a filter:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Push up on the outside rigid edge of the
filter until the tabs are released, then
remove the filter.
E146321
To install a filter:
1. First, position the filter in its housing
making sure that the far forward end is
all the way up in the housing.
2. Push in on the center of the outside edge
of the filter and rotate clockwise into the
housing until it clips into position.
Second-Row Climate Controlled Seats Air
Filter Replacement
The climate controlled seat system includes
air filters. You must replace them periodically.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 387).
There is a filter under each second-row seat.
Tumble the seat forward to access the filter.
151
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNINGS
Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from
obstruction when you are programming. Do
not program the system with the vehicle in
the garage.
Do not use the system with any garage
door opener that does not have the
safety stop and reverse feature as required
by U.S. Federal Safety Standards (this
includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
152
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
153
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
154
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
155
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’ s authority
to operate the equipment.
156
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNINGS
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Do not use a power point for operating
a cigar lighter. Incorrect use of the
power points can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty, and can result in fire
or serious injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This will damage
the power point and blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• Near the floor inside the front console
bin.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• Inside the luggage compartment.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices plugged
in the power point whenever the
device is not in use. Do not use any
extension cord with the 110 volt AC power
point, since it will defeat the safety protection
design. Doing so may cause the power point
to overload due to powering multiple devices
that can reach beyond the 150 watt load limit
and could result in fire or serious injury.
Note: The power point will turn off when the
ignition is switched off or the battery voltage
drops below 11 volts.
Use the power point for powering electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
157
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
158
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E213208
Lane keeping system and active
park assist.
A
Cup holder.B
Center storage compartment with
auxiliary power point, USB, or USB
and SD card.
C
Auxiliary power point.D
Rear storage compartment.E
Auxiliary power point or cigar
lighter.
F
Rear climate controls.G
Second Row Center Console (If Equipped)
A B C
E211652
Cup holder, auxiliary power point,
and 110 volt power point.
A
Armrest.B
Utility compartment and
refrigerator unit.
C
Console Refrigerator and Freezer (If
Equipped)
This feature operates when the vehicle is on
or in accessory mode. Limit the time of use
when the vehicle is in accessory mode to
avoid the battery running out of charge. You
should only use this feature when the vehicle
is running.
E211653
Flip the console lid forward, then lift off the
cover to open the cooling compartment.
Make sure to replace the cover after using
it. This helps maintain a more consistent
cooling temperature.
159
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
E211654
Refrigerator: Briefly press and hold COOL.
The indicator light on the cool side of the
switch illuminates and the indicator light on
the freeze side glows when the refrigerator
is active. The temperature cools to
approximately 41°F (5°C). Briefly press and
hold COOL again to switch off the
refrigerator. Briefly press and hold FREEZE
to change to freezer mode.
Freezer: Briefly press and hold FREEZE. Both
indicator lights illuminate when the freezer
is active. The temperature cools to
approximately 23°F (-5°C). Press FREEZE
again to switch off the freezer. Press COOL
to change to refrigerator mode.
This feature turns off when you switch the
vehicle off. It turns back on to the last mode
when you restart the vehicle.
Cleaning and Maintenance
Note: Condensation on the inside walls of
the refrigerator is normal under certain
conditions.
This feature is maintenance free, but you can
clean the inside of the unit and the cover
with a mild soap and water solution when
needed.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
160
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine speeds
can produce very high temperatures
in the engine and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire or other damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
on dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, creating
the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles (8
kilometers) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You can
disregard any unusual driving characteristics
during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E191075
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once when the
ignition is in the on mode, or when the
engine is running but the vehicle is not
moving.
On: All electrical circuits are operational and
the warning lamps and indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal, press
and release the button once.
161
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Note: You may have to press the push
button ignition switch twice to switch the
ignition on.
Start: Starts the engine.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when then ignition is on and when the
engine starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, you are
limited to a 15-second engine cranking time.
You need to wait 60 minutes before you can
crank the engine for 60 seconds again.
Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park (P).
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle to shift the transmission
out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start your vehicle, do the
following:
162
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
1
E198728
2
1. Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the passive key in this position, you
can use the push button ignition switch
to switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
your vehicle within 20 seconds of switching
it off, even if it does not detect a valid
passive key.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the push
button ignition switch. After 20 seconds, you
can no longer start your vehicle if it does not
detect a valid passive key.
Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close a
door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key. You
cannot start your vehicle if the system does
not detect a valid passive key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.
163
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown
For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the engine
if it has been idling for an extended period.
The ignition also turns off to save battery
power. Before your vehicle shuts down, a
message appears in the information display
showing a timer counting down. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your vehicle
shuts down. Another message appears in
the information display to inform you that
your vehicle has shut down to save fuel.
Start your vehicle as normal.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown. When you switch
it off temporarily, it turns on at the next
ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• Interacting with your vehicle, for example
pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 108). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the feature
off for the current ignition cycle only.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shuts
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift into
park (P).
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within two
seconds.
164
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. Do not
drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust fumes.
Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust
fumes. Take precautions to avoid its
dangerous effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Do not fully close the hood, or allow it
to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
165
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
166
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out,
which could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
Flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle
can produce static electricity. This can
cause a fire if you are filling an ungrounded
fuel container.
Gasoline may contain benzene, which
is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel such as gasoline is
highly toxic and if swallowed can cause
death or permanent injury. If fuel is
swallowed, call a physician immediately,
even if no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to
eye and respiratory tract irritation. In
severe cases, excessive or prolonged
breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious
illness and permanent injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. If
fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with water
for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
167
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and wash
skin thoroughly with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact with
fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
gasoline vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. If fuel is splashed on the skin,
wash the affected areas immediately with
plenty of soap and water. Consult a
physician immediately if you experience
any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
We recommend regular unleaded gasoline
with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some stations offer fuels posted as regular
with an octane rating below 87, particularly
in high altitude areas. We do not recommend
fuels with an octane rating below 87. To
provide improved performance, we
recommend premium fuel for severe duty
usage such as trailer tow.
Do not use any fuel other than those
recommended because they could lead to
engine damage that may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended can impair the emission
control system and cause a loss of vehicle
performance.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel (using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law).
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
168
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily under most driving conditions
while you are using fuel with the
recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is located in the spare
wheel storage tray.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine. If your vehicle is out
of fuel and on a steep slope, more fuel
may be required.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of a fuel
container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel system filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not dispose of fuel in the household
refuse or the public sewage system.
Use an authorized waste disposal facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the plastic funnel included
with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler Funnel
Location (page 169).
169
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
2. Fully insert the plastic funnel into the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the plastic funnel from the fuel
tank filler pipe opening.
5. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
6. Clean the plastic funnel and place it back
in your vehicle or properly dispose of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel system
and its seal and cause injury to you or others.
Do not remove the fuel pump nozzle
from its fully inserted position when
refueling.
WARNINGS
When refueling always shut the engine
off and never allow sparks or open
flames near the fuel tank filler valve. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Wait at least 10 seconds before
removing the fuel pump nozzle to allow
any residual fuel to drain into the fuel tank.
Stop refueling when the fuel pump
nozzle automatically shuts off for the
first time. Failure to follow this will fill the
expansion space in the fuel tank and could
lead to fuel overflowing.
Note: Your vehicle does not have a fuel filler
cap.
170
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E206911
A B
C D
Type 1: Left hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
A
Type 1: Right hand side - press the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
B
Type 2: Left hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
C
Type 2: Right hand side - pull the
fuel tank filler door to open it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel tank filler door until it
engages.
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor will
open.
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting
on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe
opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in the lower
position B when refueling. Holding the
fuel pump nozzle in the higher position
A may affect the flow of fuel and shut off
the fuel pump nozzle before the fuel tank
is full.
E206912
A B
171
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
E119081
5. Slightly raise the fuel pump nozzle and
then slowly remove it.
6. Fully close the fuel tank filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have
your vehicle checked immediately.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. The amount of usable fuel
in the empty reserve varies and should not
be relied upon to increase driving range.
• The usable capacity of the fuel tank is
the amount of fuel that can be added into
the tank after the gauge indicates empty.
• The advertised capacity is the total fuel
tank size. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 351). It is the
combined usable capacity plus the empty
reserve.
• Due to the empty reserve, you may not
be able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank even
when the fuel gauge reads empty.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when refueling:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate (low-medium-high)
each time the tank is filled.
• Allow no more than one automatic
shut-off when refueling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1,000 mi (1,600 km) of driving (this is your
engine’s break-in period). A more accurate
measurement is obtained after 2,000 mi
(3,200 km) to 3,000 mi (4,800 km). Also, fuel
expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge
readings are not accurate ways to measure
fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
172
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
2. Each time you fill the fuel tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three fill ups, fill the fuel
tank and record the current odometer
reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
To calculate L/100 km (liters per 100
kilometers) fuel consumption, multiply the
liters used by 100, then divide by kilometers
traveled. To calculate MPG (miles per gallon)
fuel consumption, divide miles traveled by
gallons used.
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of your
vehicle’ s fuel economy under current driving
conditions. Keeping records during summer
and winter will show how temperature
impacts fuel economy.
Conditions
• Heavily loading your vehicle reduces fuel
economy.
• Carrying unnecessary weight in your
vehicle may reduce fuel economy.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks may reduce fuel economy.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You will get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle
in dry grass or other dry ground cover.
The emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which can
start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you smell
exhaust fumes inside your vehicle, have your
dealer inspect your vehicle immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a catalytic
converter that will enable your vehicle to
comply with applicable exhaust emission
standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
173
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Ford parts should be equivalent to
genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 170).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
174
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service.
See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
175
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
176
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuel and Refueling
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
latch the gearshift in park (P). Turn the
ignition to the off position and remove the
key whenever you leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Move the gearshift lever into the desired
gear.
3. Come to a complete stop.
4. Move the gearshift lever and securely
latch it in park (P).
P
R
N
D
S
E142628
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P).
Reverse (R)
With the selector in reverse (R), your vehicle
moves backward. Always come to a
complete stop before shifting into and out
of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the selector in neutral (N), your vehicle
can be started and is free to roll. Hold the
brake pedal down while in this position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through all gears.
Sport (S)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
• Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy.
• Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.
177
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission (If
Equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission. The SelectShift
Automatic transmission gives you the ability
to change gears up or down (without a
clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time. Although
SelectShift makes some downshifts for you,
it still allows you to downshift at any time as
long as the SelectShift determines that
damage will not be caused to the engine
from over-revving.
Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by pressing
the + button. Notice should be taken of the
shift indicator lamp, which alerts you when
to shift to make sure you achieve the highest
level or efficiency and fuel economy.
If equipped with the toggle on the gearshift
lever, press the + toggle switch on the side
of the gearshift lever to activate SelectShift.
• Press the (+) button to upshift.
• Press the (-) button to downshift.
E142629
If equipped with steering wheel paddles,
pull the + paddle on the steering wheel to
activate SelectShift.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
SelectShift in drive (D):
• Provides a temporary manual mode for
performing more demanding maneuvers
where extra control of gear selection is
required (for example, when towing or
overtaking). This mode will hold a
selected gear for a temporary period of
time dependent on driver inputs (for
example, steering or accelerator pedal
input).
178
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
SelectShift in sport (S):
• Provides a permanent manual gear
selection where full control of gear
selection is required.
To exit SelectShift mode shift the
transmission into another gear (for example,
drive [D]).
The instrument cluster displays your currently
selected gear. If a gear is requested but not
available due to vehicle conditions (low
speed, too high engine speed for requested
gear selection), the current gear will flash
three times.
Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the
transmission automatically downshifts for
maximum performance.
Note: In low traction conditions, you can pull
away in second gear using SelectShift. To
perform this operation, select drive (D) or
sport (S) mode and press the + toggle (if
equipped) or pull the + paddle (if equipped)
until 2 is displayed on the cluster. Your
vehicle is now ready to move in 2nd gear.
Brake-Shift Interlock
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking your vehicle out of park (P)
which means your vehicle can roll freely. To
avoid unwanted vehicle movement, always
fully set the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheel chocks if appropriate.
If you fully release the parking brake
and the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Note: For some markets this feature will be
disabled.
Your vehicle is equipped with a brake-shift
interlock feature that prevents moving the
gearshift lever from park (P) when the ignition
is in the on position and the brake pedal is
not pressed.
If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of
park (P) position with the ignition in the on
position and the brake pedal pressed, a
malfunction may have occurred. It is possible
that a fuse has blown or your vehicle’ s brake
lamps are not operating properly. See Fuse
Specification Chart (page 269).
If the fuse is not blown and the brake lamps
are working properly, the following
procedure will allow you to move the
gearshift lever from park (P):
1. Apply the parking brake, turn the ignition
off and remove the key.
179
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
E224615
2. Remove the access plug on the side of
the center console.
3. Apply the brake pedal. Using a suitable
tool (for example, a screwdriver), push
the brake-shift interlock override lever
forward while pulling the gearshift lever
out of park (P) and into neutral (N).
4. Install the access plug on side of the
center console.
5. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle,
and release the parking brake.
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature may increase durability and
provide consistent shift feel over the life of
your vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission
may have firm shifts, soft shifts or both. This
operation is considered normal and does not
affect function or durability of the
transmission. Over time, the adaptive
learning process fully updates transmission
operation.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you may rock it out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
180
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-wheel drive uses all four wheels to power
the vehicle. This increases traction, enabling
you to drive over terrain and road conditions
that a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot. The AWD system is active all the time
and requires no input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those
conditions could subject the vehicle to
excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present,
the warning Check AWD displays in the
information display. The AWD system is not
functioning correctly and defaults to
front-wheel drive. When this warning
displays, have your vehicle serviced at an
authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to front-wheel
drive. This may occur if the vehicle is
operated in extreme conditions with
excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand.
To resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine has been restarted and the
AWD system has adequately cooled, the
AWD OFF message will turn off and normal
AWD function returns. If the engine is not
stopped, the AWD OFF message turns off
when the system cools and normal AWD
function returns.
181
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
All-Wheel Drive Messages
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
Displayed when the system has been automatically disabled to protect
itself. This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare
tire installed or if the system is overheating. The system will resume
normal function and clear this message after cycling the ignition on
and off and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed or
after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD OFF
Displayed in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction/reduced
power light when the system is not operating properly. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Check AWD
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires
A spare tire of a different size other than the
tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically and
enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components if a non-full sized tire
is installed. This condition may display an
AWD OFF message in the information
display. If there is an AWD OFF message in
the information display from using a non-full
sized spare tire, this indicator should turn off
after reinstalling the repaired or replaced
normal road tire and cycling the ignition off
and on. It is recommended to reinstall the
repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible. Major dissimilar tire sizes between
the front and rear axles (for example, 17 inch
low profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch
high profile tires on the rear axle) could
cause the AWD system to stop functioning
and default to front-wheel drive or damage
the AWD system.
182
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Operating AWD Vehicles With
Mismatched Tires
183
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
WARNING
Only use replacement tires and wheels
that are the same size, load index,
speed rating and type (such as P-metric
versus LT-metric or all-season versus
all-terrain) as those originally provided by
Ford. The recommended tire and wheel size
may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’ s seating position), or
the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch high
profile tires on the rear axle) could cause the
AWD system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system. However, the AWD system is
capable of tolerating any combination of new
and worn tires of the same original tire size.
For example, using 3 worn tread tires and 1
new tread tire all of the same original tire
size, can be tolerated by the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With All-
Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
184
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is in P
(Park). Turn the ignition to the lock position
or turn the vehicle off using the start/stop
button and remove the key whenever you
leave your vehicle.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(56 km/h). The tires may fail and injure
a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (that is, turn the steering
wheel only as rapidly and as far as
required to avoid the emergency).
Excessive steering will result in less
vehicle control, not more. Additionally,
smooth variations of the accelerator
and/or brake pedal pressure should be
utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
185
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal
injury. Use all available road surface to
return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip through
Brake, Engine, and AWD calibrations.
However, during low speed driving, disabling
traction control in deep sand can help keep
the wheels moving to maintain vehicle
momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could cause
the AWD system to overheat and default to
front-wheel drive. If this occurs, an AWD OFF
message displays in the information display.
To resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine has been restarted and the
AWD system has adequately cooled, the
AWD OFF message turns off and normal
AWD function returns. In the event the
engine is not stopped, the AWD OFF
message turns off when the system cools
and normal AWD function returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L (Low)
gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
186
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear
axle serviced by an authorized dealer.
E143950
“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities in
our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side.
Do not drive in reverse over a hill without
the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
187
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING
If you are driving in slippery conditions
that require tire chains or cables, then
it is critical that you drive cautiously. Keep
speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of the vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of the vehicle.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 190).
188
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do
not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lowering kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts
not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Ford Motor Company recommends
that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such
as ladder or luggage racks).
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended
if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.
189
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If a
metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy Wheels
(page 318).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 104).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you turn the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E144522
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal may pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
190
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
PARKING BRAKE
WARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure the transmission is locked
in park (P). Failure to set the parking brake
and engage park could result in vehicle
roll-away, property damage or bodily injury.
To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster
will illuminate and remains illuminated until
the parking brake is released.
To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade or
with a trailer, press and hold the brake pedal
down, then set the parking brake. There may
be a little vehicle movement as the parking
brake sets to hold the vehicle's weight. This
is normal and should be no reason for
concern. If needed, press and hold the
service brake pedal down, then try
reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.
191
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING
The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the information display controls or the
switch. If the stability control and traction
control light is still illuminating steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with the
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General Information
(page 108).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off or
on.
The switch illuminates when traction control
is off.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
192
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
193
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving braking
system, aftermarket roof racks,
suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNINGS
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the systems applies higher
brake forces.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which it
changes by applying the brakes to one or
more wheels individually.
194
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 192).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page
192).
195
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations of
the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving on a
flat surface at parking speeds. Certain
objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves, surrounding vehicle's parking aid
systems, traffic control systems, fluorescent
lamps, inclement weather, air brakes, and
external motors and fans may also affect the
function of the sensing system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in reverse (R) and
when using the sensing system.
WARNINGS
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed to provide a warning
to assist the driver in detecting large
stationary objects to avoid damaging your
vehicle. The system may not detect smaller
objects, particularly those close to the
ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard racks
and any device that may block the normal
detection zone of the system, may create
false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: The sensing system cannot be turned
off when a MyKey is present. See Principle
of Operation (page 63).
Note: If you attach certain add-on devices
such as a trailer or bike rack, the rear
sensing system may detect that add-on
device and therefore provide warnings. It is
suggested that you disable the rear sensing
system when you attach an add-on device
to your vehicle to prevent these warnings.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 108).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 115).
196
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Designed to be a supplementary park
aid, this system may not work in all
conditions. This system cannot replace the
driver’s attention and judgment. The driver
is responsible for avoiding hazards and
maintaining a safe distance and speed, even
when the system is in use.
Active Park Assist does not apply the
brakes under any circumstances.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required by
grabbing the steering wheel or pressing the
active park assist button (if equipped).
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain, snow or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. Covered sensors
can affect the system's accuracy. Do not
clean the sensors with sharp objects.
197
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Active Park Assist is an electric parking aid
that uses ultrasonic sensors. The system
detects an available parallel parking space
and automatically steers your vehicle into
the space (hands-free) while you control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly instructs you to park your
vehicle.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front bumper
and the parking space (a pedestrian or
cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring
parked vehicle is high off the ground (for
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed truck).
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system.
The system may not operate correctly in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire significantly
worn more than the other tires.
• One or more tires are improperly inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached a bike rack, trailer or
similar object to the front or rear of your
vehicle, close to the sensors.
• You have attached an overhanging
object (surfboard) to the roof.
• The front bumper or side sensors are
damaged or obstructed (front bumper
cover).
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle (for example, a mini-spare tire).
Using Active Park Assist
E144525
Press the button to turn the system
on or off.
When driving at a speed less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system automatically scans
both sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. A message and a
corresponding graphic appears in the display
screen to indicate it is searching for a parking
space. Use the direction indicator to indicate
which side of your vehicle you want the
system to search.
Note: If the direction indicator is not on, the
system automatically searches on your
vehicle's passenger side.
198
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
E130107
When the system finds a suitable space, the
touchscreen displays a message and a chime
sounds. Slow down, continue moving forward
and stop when another chime sounds and a
message displays on the touchscreen, then
follow the instructions on the touchscreen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Active park assist may not detect
vehicles with overhanging loads (a bus or a
truck), street furniture and other items. You
must make sure the selected space is
suitable for parking.
Note: You should drive your vehicle within
5 ft (1.5 m) and as parallel to the other
vehicles as possible while passing a parking
space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (for example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces while you
are driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h), the display screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce your vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 22 mph
(35 km/h) or the maneuver is interrupted
(driver input is detected), the system switches
off and you need to take full control of your
vehicle.
Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before
completion, the system switches off. The
steering wheel position will not indicate the
actualy position of the steering and you have
to take full control of your vehicle.
199
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
When you shift the transmission into reverse
(R), with your hands off the wheel (and
nothing obstructing its movement), your
vehicle steers itself into the space. The
system displays instructions to move your
vehicle back and forth in the space.
E130108
When you think your vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid (accompanied
by a touchscreen display message and a
chime), bring your vehicle to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
display screen displays a message and a
chime sounds, indicating that the active park
assist process is done. The driver is
responsible for checking the parking job and
making any necessary corrections before
putting the transmission in park (P).
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
Manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the active park assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an active
park search.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) during
automatic steering.
• Turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
• Something touches the steering wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed by
a chime. Occasional system messages may
occur in normal operation. For recurring or
frequent system faults, contact an authorized
dealer to have your vehicle serviced.
200
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off.
The transmission is in reverse (R); your vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space.
The system does not offer a particular space
The sensors may be covered (for example, snow, ice or dirt buildup). Covered sensors can affect the system's functionality
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is farther than 5 ft (1.5 m) or closer than 16 in (40 cm) away.
Your vehicle is going faster than 22 mph (35 km/h).
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
201
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
The system does not position your vehicle where I want in the space
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (rolling forward when reverse [R] is selected).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning your vehicle properly.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly.
Your vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space.
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (not inflated correctly, improper size, or of different sizes).
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed, etc).
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed.
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (driving from a heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash).
You didn't wait for the steering to complete its rotation after a gear change. The system performs best when the steering wheel is allowed
to finish rotating before accelerating.
202
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that still
requires the driver to use it in conjunction
with the interior and exterior mirrors for
maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper,
might not be seen on the screen due to the
limited coverage of the camera system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your reaction
time to stop your vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear video
camera and the luggage compartment
door is ajar. If the luggage compartment door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position and
the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the luggage
compartment door is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off. Make sure your
vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
During operation, lines appear in the display
which represent your vehicle’s path and
proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
E142435
The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show the
intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of your
vehicle with an object (for example, a
trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment door or liftgate is
open, no rear view camera features will
display.
203
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to become
misaligned.
Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelines (If equipped)A
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not display
when the steering wheel position is straight.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of the
vehicle.
204
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full area
behind your vehicle may not show. Be
aware of your surroundings when using the
manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are Zoom
in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the symbol in
the camera screen to change the view. The
default setting is Zoom OFF.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R).
Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
Enhanced Park Aids or Park Pilot
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when any of the sensing systems
detect an object.
Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera delay
is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).
205
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control on winding
roads, in heavy traffic or when the road
surface is slippery. This could result in loss
of vehicle control, serious injury or death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above the
set speed. The system will not apply the
brakes but a warning displays.
E173610
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator appears in the
instrument cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator will change color.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed while driving
uphill.
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select kph as the display
measurement in the information display,
the set speed changes in approximately
2 kph increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display, the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.
206
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
Switching Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to changing
road conditions when using adaptive
cruise control. The system does not replace
attentive driving. Failing to pay attention to
the road may result in a crash, serious injury
or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
stationary or slow moving vehicles
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
pedestrians or objects in the road.
Adaptive cruise control does not detect
oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Do not use adaptive cruise control on
winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could result
in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or
death.
Do not use adaptive cruise control
when towing a trailer that has trailer
brakes. The auto-brake component of the
adaptive cruise control system does not
operate the trailer brakes. Using adaptive
cruise control when towing a trailer that has
trailer brakes may result in the loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
WARNINGS
Do not use tire sizes other than those
recommended because this can affect
the normal operation of the system. Failing
to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
E173611
The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.
207
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The indicator appears in the
information display.
E164805
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in the
information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
E164805
5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle, your vehicle
does not decelerate automatically to a
stop, nor does your vehicle always
decelerate quickly enough to avoid a crash
without driver intervention. Always apply the
brakes when necessary. Failing to do so may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles detected by the radar sensor.
In some cases there may be no warning or
a delayed warning. You should always apply
the brakes when necessary. Failure to do so
may result in a crash, serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance.
A vehicle graphic illuminates in the
information display.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.
208
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from
the vehicle in front. The brake lamps
automatically turn on when the system
applies the brakes. The maximum braking
which the system applies is limited. You can
override the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system continues
to brake. A red warning bar displays on the
windshield and you must take immediate
action.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small temporary
acceleration to help you pass.
Setting the Gap Distance
E173611
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the graphic.
You can select four gap settings.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and
therefore the distance automatically adjusts
to the set speed.
209
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Adaptive cruise control gap settings
Dynamic behaviorGapTime gap, secondsGraphic display, bars indic-
ated between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 (28)1162 (100)
Normal43 (39)1.4262 (100)
Normal55 (50)1.8362 (100)
Comfort67 (61)2.2462 (100)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system selects the last chosen gap.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press and release CNCL or tap the brake
pedal. The set speed does not erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
If you override the system by pressing
the accelerator pedal, it does not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain a
gap from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap by
pressing the accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the system, the
green indicator light illuminates
and the lead vehicle graphic does
not show in the information display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
210
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Changing the Set Speed
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. When
you select km/h as the display
measurement in the information display
the set speed changes in approximately
2 km/h increments. When you select mph
as the display measurement in the
information display the set speed
changes in approximately 1 mph
increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach the desired speed. Press and
release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES. Your vehicle speed
returns to the previously set speed and gap
setting.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
The system does not operate below 12 mph
(20 km/h). An audible warning sounds and
the automatic braking releases if the vehicle
drops below this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations such
as prolonged downhill driving on steep
grades, for example in mountainous areas.
The system needs additional engine braking
in these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent
them from overheating.
Note: An audible warning sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool down. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have cooled
down.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
Press and release OFF when the system is
in stand by mode or switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING
On rare occasions, detection issues
can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels
and safety barriers. In these cases, the
system may brake late or unexpectedly. At
all times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
211
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
With vehicles that edge into your
lane that can only be detected
once they have moved fully into
your lane.
A
Motorcyclists may be detected
late, or not at all.
B
With vehicles in front of you when
going into and coming out of a
bend. The detection beam does
not follow sharp curves in the road.
C
In these cases the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
intervene if necessary.
If something hits the front of your vehicle or
damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone may
change. This could cause missed or false
vehicle detections. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
212
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The sensor
is located on the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function when something obstructs the radar
signals.
The following table lists possible causes and actions for this message displaying.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
213
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is
possible to get a blockage warning and not
be blocked. This can happen, for example,
when driving in sparse rural environments.
A false blocked condition self clears or clears
after a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control does not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected and
apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, the system does not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking does not activate.
214
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed to
aid you. It is not intended to replace
your attention and judgment. You are still
responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system will
be active at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display will inform you that the
system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one lane
marking can be detected by the camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off through
the information display by selecting Settings
then Driver Assist then Driver Alert in the
menu. When activated, the system will
monitor your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At first
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message will
only appear for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
another warning may be issued which will
remain in the information display for a longer
time. Press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning.
System Display
When active the system will run automatically
in the background and only issue a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
General Information (page 108).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.
E131358
215
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right as
the calculated alertness level decreases. As
the rest icon is approached the color turns
from green to yellow to red. The yellow
position indicates the first warning is active
and the red position indicates the second
warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the typical
range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level will change to
grey for a short time and the information
display will inform you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
The system does not relieve you of
your responsibility to drive with due
care and attention.
At all times you are responsible for
controlling your vehicle, supervising
the system and intervening if required.
WARNINGS
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace the
driver's attention and judgement. The driver
is still responsible to drive with due care and
attention.
In cold and severe weather conditions
the system may not function. Rain,
snow, spray can all limit sensor performance.
Large contrasts in lighting can limit
sensor performance.
The system will not operate if the
sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
The vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer for inspection if
damage occurs in the immediate area
surrounding the sensor.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
216
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked or there is damage to the
windshield.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system will alert you to put your hands
on the steering wheel. The system may
detect a light grip or touch on the steering
wheel as hands off driving.
The system notifies you to stay in your lane
through the steering system and the
instrument cluster display when the front
camera detects an unintentional drift out of
your lane is likely to occur. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera mounted
behind the interior rear view mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey
it defaults to on and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey is detected, pressing the
button will not affect the on or off status of
the system.
E144813
Press the button located on the
center console to switch the
system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. To view or adjust the settings, See
General Information (page 108). The system
stores the last-known selection for each of
these settings. You do not need to readjust
your settings each time you turn on the
system.
Mode (if equipped): This setting allows you
to select which of the system features you
can enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
Note: Some vehicles are equipped with the
alert function only.
E165516
Aid only (if equipped) – Provides an
assistance steering torque input toward the
lane center when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
217
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid (if equipped) – Provides an
assistance steering torque input toward the
lane center. If your vehicle continues drifting
out of the lane, the system provides a
steering wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity (if equipped): This setting affects
the intensity of the steering wheel vibration
used for the alert and alert + aid modes. This
setting does not affect the aid mode.
• Low
• Normal
• High
System Display
E151660
When you switch on the system, an overhead
graphic of a vehicle with lane markings will
display in the information display. If you
select aid mode when you switch on the
system, a separate white icon will also
appear or in some vehicles arrows will
display with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics will not display.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings will change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side(s). This may be
because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The turn indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
218
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog), traffic conditions (following a large
vehicle that is blocking or shadowing the
lane), or vehicle conditions (poor
headlamp illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
The last Alert warning or Aid intervention occurred a short time ago
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
219
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
220
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been modified
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
A
A
E124788
The Blind Spot Information System is
designed to aid you in detecting vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
beyond the bumper. The system is designed
to alert you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not prevent contact with other vehicles
or objects; nor detect parked vehicles,
people, animals or infrastructure (fences,
guardrails, trees). It’s only designed to alert
you to vehicles in the blind spot zones.
221
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly through
the blind spot zone, typically fewer than two
seconds, the system does not trigger.
Using the System
The Blind Spot Information System turns on
when you start the engine and you drive your
vehicle forward above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For automatic transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System remains on while the
transmission is in drive (D). If shifted into
reverse (R) or park (P) the Blind Spot
Information System turns off. Once shifted
back into drive (D), the Blind Spot Information
System turns back on when you drive your
vehicle above 5 mph (8 km/h).
For manual transmissions, the Blind Spot
Information System is on for all gears except
the reverse (R).
Note: The Blind Spot Information System
does not function in reverse (R) or park (P).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The Blind Spot Information System
illuminates an amber alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of your vehicle the
approaching vehicle is coming from.
The alert indicator dims when the system
detects nighttime darkness.
System Sensor Blockage
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use the
Blind Spot Information System as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors or looking over your shoulder
before changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Information System is not a replacement for
careful driving.
222
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Any dirt, mud and snow
in front of the sensors and/or driving in heavy
rain can cause system degradation. Also,
other types of obstructions in front of the
sensor can cause system degradation. This
is referred to as a ‘blocked’ condition.
Note: Do not apply bumper stickers and/or
repair compound to these areas, this can
cause degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message warning
of a blocked sensor will appear in the
information display. Also the system alert
indicators will remain ON and the system will
no longer provide any vehicle warnings. You
can clear the information display warning but
the alert indicators will remain illuminated.
A "blocked" condition can be cleared in two
ways:
• After the blockage in front of the sensors
is removed or the rainfall/snowfall rate
decreases or stops, drive for a few
minutes in traffic to allow the sensors to
detect passing vehicles.
• By cycling the ignition from ON to OFF
and then back ON.
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors may
detect the trailer thus causing a false alert.
It may be desirable to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off if the false alerts
become annoying.
System Errors
If the system senses a problem with the left
or right sensor, the telltale will illuminate and
a message will appear in the information
display. See Information Messages (page
115).
223
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the Blind Spot
Information System off in the information
display. See General Information (page 108).
When the Blind Spot Information System
switches off, you will not receive alerts and
the information display shows a system off
message. The telltale in the cluster also
illuminates. When you switch the Blind Spot
Information System on or off, the alert
indicators flash twice.
Note: The system switches back on every
time you start your vehicle.
You can also have the Blind Spot Information
System switched off permanently at an
authorized dealer. Once switched off
permanently, the system can only be
switched back on at an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the Cross Traffic Alert system as a
replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross Traffic Alert is not a
replacement for careful driving.
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to warn you
of vehicles approaching from the sides when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
Using the System
Cross Traffic Alert turns on when you start
the engine and you shift into reverse (R).
Once shifted out of reverse (R), Cross Traffic
Alert turns off.
Note: Cross Traffic Alert only functions while
your transmission is in reverse (R).
Cross Traffic Alert is designed to alert the
driver of certain collision risks. Coverage
decreases when the sensors are partially,
mostly or fully obstructed. Reversing slowly
helps increase the coverage area and
effectiveness.
224
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage to the
right is nearly maximized.
225
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at shallow angles. Here, the left sensor is
mostly obstructed; zone coverage on that
side is severely limited.
226
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
E142442
The Cross Traffic Alert illuminates an amber
alert indicator in the outside mirror on the
side of your vehicle the approaching vehicle
is coming from. Cross Traffic Alert also
sounds an audible alert and a message
appears in the information display indicating
a vehicle is coming from the right or left.
Cross Traffic Alert works with the reverse
sensing system that sounds its own series
of tones. See Rear Parking Aid (page 197).
E205199
The system uses radar sensors that are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow mud, snow
or bumper stickers to obstruct these areas,
this can cause degraded system
performance. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 221). If the Blind Spot
Information System is blocked, Cross Traffic
Alert is also blocked. A corresponding
message appears in the information display
as soon as you shift the transmission into
reverse (R).
System Limitations
Cross Traffic Alert has its limitations;
situations such as severe weather conditions
or debris build-up on the sensor area may
limit vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the Cross Traffic Alert performance:
• Stationary or slow moving vehicles.
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lame.
• Severe weather conditions.
227
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
• Debris build-up near or around the
sensor(s).
• Small distance to the vehicle ahead.
Certain conditions may reduce the visibility
of the warning lamp; therefore, it is
recommended to keep the audible warning
on.
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
False Alerts
Note: When towing a trailer, the sensors may
detect the trailer thus causing a false alert.
It may be desirable to turn the Blind Spot
Information System off if the false alerts
become annoying.
There may be certain instances when there
is a false alert by the Cross Traffic Alert
system that illuminates the alert indicator
with no vehicle in the coverage zone. Some
amount of false alerts are normal; they are
temporary and self-correct.
System Errors
If Cross Traffic Alert senses a problem with
the left or right sensor a message will appear
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 115).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch Cross Traffic Alert
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 108). When you switch
Cross Traffic Alert off, you will not receive
alerts and the information display will display
a system off message.
Note: The Cross Traffic Alert switches on
whenever the ignition is switched on and
ready to provide appropriate alerts when
the transmission is in reverse (R). Cross
Traffic Alert will not remember the last
selected on or off setting.
You can also have Cross Traffic Alert
switched off permanently at an authorized
dealer. Once switched off permanently, the
system can only be switched back on at an
authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system has
diagnostic checks that continuously
monitor the system. If a fault is detected, a
message displays in the information display.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. Switch the ignition off. After at least 10
seconds, switch the ignition on and watch
the information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
If the system detects an error, you may
not feel a difference in the steering,
however a serious condition may exist.
Obtain immediate service from an authorized
dealer, failure to do so may result in loss of
steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
228
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (If
Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT activate the
brakes automatically. Failure to press the
brake pedal to activate the brakes may result
in a collision.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent all
collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to
maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is active
at speeds above approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h).
229
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver of
certain collision risks. A radar detects if your
vehicle is rapidly approaching another
vehicle traveling in the same direction as
yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and an
audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the driver
in reducing the collision speed by charging
the brakes. If the risk of collision further
increases after the warning light illuminates,
the brake support prepares the brake system
for rapid braking. This may be apparent to
the driver. The system does not automatically
activate the brakes but, if the brake pedal is
pressed, full force braking is applied even if
the brake pedal is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings by
using the information display control. See
General Information (page 108).
Note: If collision warnings are perceived as
being too frequent or disturbing then the
warning sensitivity can be reduced, though
the manufacturer recommends using the
highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings. See General
Information (page 108).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
230
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the radar
signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located behind
a fascia cover near the driver side of the
lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this message
being displayed.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is no longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily disabled. Collision warning
should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather condi-
tions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals
231
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the driver
applies the vehicle’s brakes. The brake pedal
must be pressed just like any typical braking
situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology, there
may be certain instances where vehicles do
not provide a collision warning. These
include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see blocked
sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to have
your collision warning radar checked for
proper coverage and operation.
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock absorbers
stiffness in real time to match the road
surface and driver inputs. This system
continuously monitors your vehicle’s
motion (roll, pitch, bounce), suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions,
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
232
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive Control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or in Sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle’s Drive
Control settings from the main menu on
the information display:
Settings
Drive ControlVehicle
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors will gray out the mode
selections within the information display,
preventing you from changing states when
the gear position is changed. Other types of
errors produce a temporary message in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 115). If either condition
persists for multiple key cycles, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.
233
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Aids
REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE (If
Equipped)
E210725
Pull the strap at the front of the cargo area
to open the storage compartment.
CARGO NETS (If Equipped)
WARNING
This net is not designed to restrain
objects during a collision or heavy
braking.
E210726
The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
provided anchors. Do not put more than
50 lb (22 kg) in the net.
LUGGAGE COVERS (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure that the posts are properly
latched in mounting features. The
cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or
accident if it is not securely installed.
WARNINGS
Do not place any objects on the cargo
area shade. They may obstruct your
vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in
a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.
E142447
Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.
To operate the cargo shade:
234
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
1. Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod into
the retention slots located on the rear
quarter trim panels.
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section will guide you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer or both,
to keep your loaded vehicle weight
within its design rating capability, with
or without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle will provide maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before
loading your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or
without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
Label or Safety Compliance Certification
Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight of the
vehicle including a full tank of fuel and
all standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or optional
equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight of
your new vehicle when you picked it up
from your authorized dealer plus any
aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
235
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Payload - is the combined weight of
cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door (vehicles exported outside
the US and Canada may not have a Tire
Label). Look for “THE COMBINED
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO
SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR
XXX lb.” for maximum payload. The
payload listed on the Tire Label is the
maximum payload for the vehicle as built
by the assembly plant. If you install any
aftermarket or authorized-dealer
installed equipment on the vehicle, you
must subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire Label in order to determine the
new payload.
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E210944
E210945
236
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional equipment.
When towing, trailer tongue load or king
pin weight is also part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total
weight placed on each axle (front and
rear) including vehicle curb weight and
all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) - is
the maximum allowable weight that can
be carried by a single axle (front or rear).
These numbers are shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
237
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143818
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the
Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position. The
Gross Vehicle Weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating.
238
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Example only:
E198828
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety Compliance
Certification Label vehicle weight
rating limits could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance, engine,
transmission and/or structural damage,
serious damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.
239
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is the
Gross Vehicle Weight plus the weight of
the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can handle
without risking damage. (Important: The
towing vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle. The
Gross Combined Weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It
assumes a vehicle with mandatory
options, driver and front passenger
weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms] each),
no cargo weight (internal or external)
and a tongue load of 10–15%
(conventional trailer) or king pin weight
of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult
an authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin
Weight - refers to the amount of the
weight that a trailer pushes down on a
trailer hitch.
240
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268
kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a proper
tongue load range of 500 to 750 pounds
(227 to 340 kilograms). For an 11500
pound (5216 kilogram) fifth wheel trailer,
multiply by 0.15 and 0.25 to obtain a
proper king pin load range of 1725 to
2875 pounds (782 to 1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires with
lower load carrying capacities than
the original tires because they may
lower the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limitations. Replacement tires with a
higher limit than the original tires do not
increase the GVWR and GAWR
limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.).
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few examples
on how to calculate the available amount
of cargo and luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
241
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating specified for your vehicle on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label.
The label shall be affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver seating position.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING
Loaded vehicles may handle
differently than unloaded vehicles.
Extra precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, should be taken when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.
Your vehicle can haul more cargo and
people than most passenger cars.
Depending upon the type and
placement of the load, hauling cargo
and people may raise the center of
gravity of the vehicle.
242
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the certification
label.
Towing trailers beyond the
maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays, related
to towing. See Fuses (page 269).
Your vehicle's load capacity designation
is by weight, not by volume, so you
cannot necessarily use all available
space when loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra load on
your vehicle's engine, transmission, axle,
brakes, tires and suspension. Inspect
these components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects your vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items centered
between the left and right side trailer
tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in the
Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 235).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
243
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING
Turning off trailer sway control
increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature except
in situations where speed reduction may be
detrimental (such as hill climbing), the driver
has significant trailer towing experience, and
can control trailer sway and maintain safe
operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine torque
to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer begins
to sway, the stability control warning lamp
flashes and a message appears in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 115). Slow your vehicle
down, pull safely to the side of the road and
check for correct load distribution. See Load
Carrying (page 234).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: 2.0L front-wheel drive and 3.7L
all-wheel drive applications, available
on Limousine and Livery only, cannot
tow a trailer.
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Make sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area. Do not
exceed 20 feet² (1.86 meters²) if your
vehicle can tow a class I trailer or 40
feet² (3.72 meters²) if your vehicle can
tow a class III trailer.
244
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1000 feet (300 meters) starting
at the 1000 foot (300 meter) elevation
point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
use electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a class I or III
trailer provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
maximum trailer weight listed for your
vehicle configuration on the following
chart.
Maximum trailer weightMaximum GCWRPowertrain and trailer class
2000 lb (907 kg)6900 lb (3131 kg)3.7L TiVCT front-wheel drive, Class I
2000 lb (907 kg)7200 lb (3267 kg)3.5L GTDi all-wheel drive, Class I
4500 lb (2042 kg)
*
9750 lb (4424 kg)3.5L GTDi all-wheel drive, Class III
*
For towing trailers up to 4500 pounds (2042 kilograms), use a weight-carrying hitch and ball, which uniformly spreads the
trailer tongue loads through your vehicle’s underbody structure.
245
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 235).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles
with a Trailer Towing Package and
7–Pin Connector)
E211391
When attaching the trailer wiring connector
to your vehicle, only use a proper fitting
connector that works with the vehicle and
trailer functions. Some seven-position
connectors may have the SAE J2863 logo,
which confirms that it is the proper wiring
connector and works correctly with your
vehicle.
FunctionColor
Left turn signal and stop lampYellow
Ground (-)White
Electric brakesBlue
Right turn signal and stop lampGreen
Battery (+)Orange
Running lightsBrown
Reverse lightsGrey
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
246
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
WARNING
Do not adjust a weight-distributing
hitch to any position where the rear
bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was
before attaching the trailer. Doing so will
defeat the function of the weight-distributing
hitch, which may cause unpredictable
handling, and could result in serious personal
injury.
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
1. Park your vehicle, without the trailer, on
a level surface.
2. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
3. Attach the trailer to your vehicle without
the weight-distributing bars connected.
4. Measure the height of the top of your
vehicle’s front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
5. Install and adjust the tension in the
weight distributing bars so that the height
of the front fender is approximately
halfway between H1 and H2.
6. Check that the trailer is level. If not level,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 3–6.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING
Do not connect a trailer's hydraulic
brake system directly to your vehicle's
brake system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances of
having a collision greatly increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500
pounds (680 kilograms) when loaded.
247
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Trailer Brake Controller Connector (If
Equipped)
The connector is located under the
instrument panel above the brake pedal.
E211392
Trailer Lamps
WARNING
Never connect any trailer lamp wiring
to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring; this
may damage the electrical system resulting
in fire. Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible for assistance in proper
trailer tow wiring installation. Additional
electrical equipment may be required.
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph (113
km/h) during the first 500 miles (800
kilometers).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 miles (80
kilometers).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in position P to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
248
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
position P.
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. (Chocks not included
with vehicle.)
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 inches (15 centimeters) above the
bottom edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
Any time the rear axle submerges in water,
replace the rear axle lubricant. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
249
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or, if
you are a member of a roadside assistance
program, your roadside assistance service
provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt
towing procedure. Vehicle damage may
occur if towed incorrectly, or by any other
means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle), it can be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot shift
into neutral (N), you may need to override
it. See Transmission (page 177).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being towed.
250
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 127).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed
these guidelines to prevent damage to your
transmission.
Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™/3.7L
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable (without
access to wheel dollies or vehicle transport
trailer), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the
ground, regardless of the powertrain and
transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for towing
in a forward direction.
• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot shift
into neutral (N), you may need to override
it. See Transmission (page 177).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
WARNING
If your vehicle has a steering wheel
lock make sure the ignition is in the
accessory or on position when being towed.
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 127).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. We designed
these guidelines to prevent damage to your
transmission.
You can tow your 3.5L EcoBoost or 3.7L
Duratec equipped vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless start
button until the vehicle starts.
251
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Turn the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door key
to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 303).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1. Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).
3. Turn off your vehicle by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 303).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
All Vehicles
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
five minutes at the beginning of each day
and every six hours thereafter. With the
engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).
Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow dolly,
follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
All-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your all-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your all-wheel drive vehicle with the
front wheels off the ground (by using a tow
dolly) and the rear wheels on the ground.
This causes damage to your all-wheel drive
system. If you are using a vehicle transport
trailer, follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
252
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1000
miles (1600 kilometers). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the gears
early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1000 miles (1600
kilometers).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING
Do not drive through flowing or deep
water as you may lose control of your
vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
253
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
E176360
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle. Only use floor mats that leave the
pedal area unobstructed. Only use floor mats
that are firmly secured to retention posts so
that they cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the pedals or impair safe
operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can
cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
Always make sure that the floor mats
are properly attached to the retention
posts in the carpet that are supplied with
your vehicle. Floor mats must be properly
secured to both retention posts to make sure
mats do not shift out of position.
WARNINGS
Never place floor mats or any other
covering in the vehicle foot well that
cannot be properly secured to prevent them
from moving and interfering with the pedals
or the ability to control the vehicle.
Never place floor mats or any other
covering on top of already installed
floor mats. Floor mats should always rest on
top of vehicle carpeting surface and not
another floor mat or other covering.
Additional floor mats or any other covering
will reduce the pedal clearance and
potentially interfere with pedal operation.
Check attachment of floor mats on a
regular basis. Always properly reinstall
and secure floor mats that have been
removed for cleaning or replacement.
Always make sure that objects cannot
fall into the driver foot well while the
vehicle is moving. Objects that are loose can
become trapped under the pedals causing
a loss of vehicle control.
254
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
WARNINGS
Failure to properly follow floor mat
installation or attachment instructions
can potentially cause interference with pedal
operation causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
To install floor mats, position the floor mat
so that the eyelet is over the retention post
and press down to lock in.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
255
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
If you ever need help on the road, the Lincoln
Motor Company is there for you with
nationwide, 24-hours-a-day,
seven-days-a-week assistance.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain warranty
coverage period for subsequent owners.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.
This complimentary Roadside Assistance
program is separate from the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and includes:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2.0 gal (7.5 L) of gasoline or 5.0 gal
(18.9 L) of diesel fuel to a disabled
vehicle. Roadside Assistance limits fuel
delivery service to two no-charge
occurrences within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (161 km) of
the disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a tow
to a selling or preferred dealer that is
more than 100 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall be
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
coverage for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is not,
then the trailer does not qualify for any
roadside services.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Lincoln Motor
Company will ask you to submit your original
receipts.
256
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.
Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-387-5333.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your wallet
for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove compartment of your
vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not running,
the battery will lose charge. There may be
insufficient power to restart your vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and rear
direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that the
fuel system be inspected by an authorized
dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle includes a fuel pump
shutoff feature that stops the flow of fuel to
the engine. Not every impact will cause a
shutoff.
257
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Should your vehicle shut off after a collision,
you may restart your vehicle. For vehicles
equipped with a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to re-enable the
fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to switch
off the ignition.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button to switch on the
ignition.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button to
switch off the ignition.
4. You can either attempt to start the engine
by pressing the brake pedal and the
START/STOP button, or switch on the
ignition only by pressing the
START/STOP button without pressing
the brake pedal. Both ways re-enable the
fuel system.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once your vehicle determines that the
systems are safe, then the vehicle will allow
you to restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does not
restart after your third attempt, contact an
authorized dealer.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Use only adequately sized cables with
insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
258
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNINGS
Do not attach the cables to fuel lines,
engine rocker covers, the intake
manifold or electrical components as
grounding points. Stay clear of moving parts.
To avoid reverse polarity connections, make
sure that you correctly identify the positive
(+) and negative (-) terminals on both the
disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet
located above the positive (+) terminal of
your vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (-) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause an
explosion of the gases that surround the
battery.
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
4
2
1
3
E142664
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
259
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
260
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
261
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
262
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18000
miles (29 000 km), whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
263
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
264
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only
get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than
is recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without
proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty
importing your vehicle back into the United
States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands,
Central America, the Caribbean, and Israel,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the Commonwealth
of the Northern Mariana Islands (CNMI),
America Samoa, and the U.S. Virgin Islands,
please feel free to call our Toll-Free Number:
(800) 841-FORD (3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
265
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If the
authorized dealer cannot help you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Ford: 80004443673
Lincoln: 80004441067
If calling from the UAE: 80004441066
If calling from the Kingdom of Saudi Arabia:
8008443673
If calling from Kuwait: 22280384
FAX: +971 4 3327266
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate to any of the above locations,
register your vehicle identification number
(VIN) and new address with Ford Motor
Company Export Operations & Global Growth
Initiatives by emailing [email protected].
If you are in another foreign country, contact
the nearest authorized dealer. In the event
your inquiry is unresolved, communicate your
concern with the dealership’ s Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager. If you require additional assistance
or clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as previously
listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER'S
LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached by
their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased by
credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by contacting
Helm, Incorporated using the contact
information listed previously in this section.
266
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford
Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or
Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/safevehicles-defectinvestigations-index-76.htm (English)Website
www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/VehiculesSecuritaires-Enquetes-index-76.htm (French)Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
267
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
268
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high-current fuses.
WARNINGS
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect the vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you will need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 303).
E173618
97
98
77
96
95
94
93 92 91 90 89
88
66
44
78
56
39
26
18 1617
3 12456789
192021222324
2728293031
40414243
55
575859606162636465
798081828384858687
67
45
32
10111213
333435
464748495051
6869707172
74
73
76
75
53
37 36
54
38
25
15
14
52
269
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Fan relay 2.
40A
**
1
Fan relay 1.
40A
**
2
Trailer brake control module.
30A
**
3
Wipers.
30A
**
4
Washer pump.
Anti-lock brake system pump.
50A
**
5
B+ #1 access circuit (limousine/livery).
50A
**
6
Power liftgate.
30A
**
7
Moonroof.
20A
**
8
Power sunshade.
Second row console power point.
20A
**
9
Third row power seats relay.Relay10
Heated rear window relay.Relay11
Trailer tow battery charge relay.Relay12
270
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Starter motor relay.Relay13
Cooling fan number 2 relay.Relay14
Fuel pump relay.Relay15
B+ #2 access circuit (limousine/livery).
40A
**
16
110V AC power point.
30A
**
17
Front blower motor relay.
40A
**
18
Starter relay.
30A
**
19
Storage bin power point.
20A
**
A
20
Instrument panel power point / cigar lighter.
20A
**
21
Third row seat module.
30A
**
22
Memory module.
30A
**
23
Trailer tow battery charge (non-limousine/livery).
30A
**
24
271
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Vacuum pump relay (limousine only).
40A
**
Not used.-25
Rear window defroster.
40A
**
26
Heated mirrors.
Cargo power point.
20A
**
27
Front climate controlled seats.
30A
**
28
Rear climate controlled seats.
30A
**
29
Rear heated seats.
20A
**
30
Electric fan relay 3.
25A
**
31
Auxiliary blower motor relay.Relay32
Cooling fan #1 relay.Relay33
Front blower motor relay.Relay34
Cooling fan (series) relay.Relay35
Not used.-36
272
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Trailer tow right-hand stop/turn lamps relay.Relay37
Trailer tow reverse lamps relay.Relay38
Auxiliary blower motor.
30A
**
39
Left front smart window motor.
30A
**
40
Left rear smart window motor.
30A
**
41
Passenger power seat.
30A
**
42
Anti-lock brake system valves.
20A
**
43
Windshield washer relay.Relay44
Rain sensor.
5A
*
45
Canister vent solenoid (EcoBoost engines).
5A
*
46
Washer pump.
15A
*
47
Front park lamps.
10A
*
48
Not used.-49
273
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Heated mirrors.
10A
*
50
Powertrain control module — Injector power monitor (non-
EcoBoost engines).
5A
*
51
Not used.-52
Trailer tow left-hand stop/turn lamps relay.Relay53
Not used.-54
Wiper relay.Relay55
Fuel injectors.
30A
*
56
Fuel pump relay.
Left-hand high intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
*
57
Alternator sensor.
10A
*
58
Brake on/off switch.
10A
*
59
Trailer tow back-up lamps.
10A
*
60
B+ #6 access circuit (limousine/livery).
20A
*
61
274
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
A/C clutch relay.
10A
*
62
Trailer tow stop/turn lamps.
15A
*
63
Rear wipers.
15A
*
64
B+ #7 access circuit (limousine/livery).
20A
*
65
Powertrain control module – vehicle power relay.Relay66
Vehicle power #2 – oxygen sensor heater.
20A
*
67
Mass airflow sensor.
Variable camshaft timing solenoid valve.
Canister vent solenoid.
Canister purge solenoid.
Vehicle power #4 (ignition coils).
20A
*
68
Vehicle power 1 (powertrain control module).
20A
*
69
Vehicle power #3 (coil) – A/C clutch relay.
15A
*
70
Fan control relay coils 1-3.
Variable air conditioning compressor.
Auxiliary transmission warmup.
Turbo charge waste-gate control.
275
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Electronic compressor bypass valve.
All-wheel drive module.
Positive crankcase ventilation heater.
Not used.-71
Limousine/livery run/accessory.
5A
*
72
Limousine/livery battery saver.
5A
*
73
Not used.-74
Not used.-75
Not used.-76
Trailer tow park lamps relay.Relay77
Right high-intensity discharge headlamp.
20A
*
78
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
*
79
B+ #3 access circuit (limousine/livery).
30A
*
80
B+ #4 access circuit (limousine/livery).
15A
*
81
276
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Rear washer.
15A
*
82
Not used.-83
Trailer tow park lamps.
20A
*
84
B+ #5 access circuit (limousine/livery).
15A
*
85
Powertrain control module.
5A
*
86
Keep alive power and relay.
Powertrain control module relay.
Canister vent solenoid (non-EcoBoost engines).
Run/start relay.
5A
*
87
Run/start relay.Relay88
Anti–lock brake system module.
10A
*
89
Adaptive headlamps module.
Powertrain control module run/start.
10A
*
90
Adaptive cruise control module.
10A
*
91
Front blower relay coil.
5A
*
92
Power steering module.
277
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Auxiliary blower motor.
5A
*
93
Rear window defroster relay.
Battery charge / vacuum pump relays.
Body control module run/start.
30A
**
94
Not used.-95
Not used.-96
Not used.-97
A/C clutch relay.Relay98
*
Mini Fuses
**
Cartridge Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel. You may
need to remove a trim panel to access it.
278
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
E163102
279
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Passenger side rear window.30A1
Memory seat.15A2
Second row seats.
Passenger side front window.30A3
Demand lamps battery saver relay.10A4
Limousine battery saver.
Audio amplifier20A5
Active noise control module.
Rear climate control.5A6
Rear seat entertainment module (livery only).
USB power outlet.
Driver seat module logic.7.5A7
Left front door zone module.
Keypad.
Power liftgate.10A8
SYNC module.10A9
Electronic finish panel.
Radio frequency transceiver module.
Run accessory relay.10A10
280
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Front wiper motor relay.
Limousine run/accessory.
Intelligent access module logic.10A11
Heads-up display.
Puddle lamp.15A12
Backlighting LED.
Interior lighting.
Right-hand direction indicators.15A13
Left-hand direction indicators.15A14
Center high mounted stop lamp.15A15
Backup lamp.
Right low beam headlamp.10A16
Left low beam headlamp.10A17
Third row power seats.10A18
Start button.
Keypad illumination.
Brake-shift interlock.
Powertrain control module wake-up.
Smart amplifier.20A19
Subwoofer amplifier.
281
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare).20A20
Not used (spare).10A21
Horn relay.20A22
Steering wheel control module logic.15A23
Instrument cluster.
Steering wheel control module.15A24
Datalink.
Not used (spare).15A25
Push button ignition switch.5A26
Intelligent access module power.20A27
Not used (spare).15A28
Radio.20A29
Global positioning system module.
Front park lamps.15A30
Trailer tow relay for park lamps.
Front side markers.
Trailer tow brake controller.5A31
Smart window motors.15A32
282
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Master window and mirror switch.
Lock switch illumination.
Moonroof.
110V AC power point.
Rear seat switch (livery).
Suspension module.10A33
Reverse park aid module.10A34
Automatic high beam and lane departure module.
Rear heated seat module.
Blind spot monitor module.
Rear video camera.
Interior mirror.
Climate control humidity sensor.5A35
Overdrive cancel switch (limousine/livery).
Heads-up display.
Heated steering wheel.10A36
Refrigerator.10A37
Not used (spare).10A38
High beams.15A39
Rear park lamps.10A40
283
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
License plate lamps.
Rear light bar applique.
Occupant classification sensor.7.5A41
Restraint control module.
Not used (spare).5A42
Not used (spare).10A43
Not used (spare).10A44
Not used (spare).5A45
Climate control module.10A46
Fog lamp relay.15A47
Not used (spare).30A Circuit breaker48
Delayed accessory relay.Relay49
Body control module.
284
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
You must replace a failed fuse with one
that has the specified amperage rating.
If you use a fuse with a higher amperage
rating, you may cause severe wire damage
and may start a fire.
E142430
A fuse may fail if electrical components in
the vehicle are not properly working. A
broken wire inside the fuse indicates a failed
fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
285
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to park
(P).
2. Block the wheels.
286
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E203008
1
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand side
of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.
2
E203009
3
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left-hand
side.
E202009
4
4. Open the hood. The hood struts
automatically support the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8–12 in
(20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
287
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
A
I H
EB
C
D
F
G
E188729
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 296).A
Brake fluid reservoir (right-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 302).B
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 294).C
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).D
288
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Brake fluid reservoir (left-hand drive). See Brake Fluid Check (page 302).E
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 303).F
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 269).G
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 311).H
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 303).I
289
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
E173375
290
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Engine coolant reservoir. See Engine Coolant Check (page 296).A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 294).C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 302).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 303).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 269).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 311).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 300).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 303).I.
291
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake Fluid Check (page 302).D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V Battery (page 303).E.
Power distribution box. See Fuses (page 269).F.
Air filter assembly. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 311).G.
Automatic transmission dipstick (under air filter assembly). See Automatic Transmission Fluid Check (page 300).H.
Windshield washer fluid reservoir. See Washer Fluid Check (page 303).I.
Engine Shield
E173374
Some vehicles may be equipped with an
aero-shield under the engine. This shield
needs to be removed for service, including
oil and filter changes. The shield has four
quick-release fasteners to secure it in place.
293
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
ECOBOOST™
E161560
A B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L
ECOBOOST™/3.7L
E146429
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the oil level is between
the minimum and the maximum marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the dipstick
and remove it again to check the oil level.
If the oil level is at the minimum mark, add
oil immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when the
engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
294
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Council (ILSAC).
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. If the engine oil level is not within the
normal range, add engine oil that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 351).
3. Remove the engine oil filler cap and use
a funnel to pour the engine oil into the
opening.
4. Wipe off any spilled oil.
5. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Action and descriptionMessage
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
295
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, spilling coolant on
hot engine parts can burn you.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure. Steam
and hot liquid can come out forcefully when
you loosen the cap slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine coolant
at the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 387).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add coolant
immediately.
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant concentration
should be tested with a refractometer such
as Robinair® Coolant and Battery
Refractometer 75240. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine coolant,
antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside
of its specified function and vehicle location.
Adding Engine Coolant
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants or additives as they can
cause damage to the engine cooling or
heating systems. Your warranty may not
cover these damages.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
296
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of engine
coolants may harm your engine’s cooling
system. Use prediluted engine coolant
meeting the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 351).
The use of an incorrect coolant may harm
the engine or cooling system components
and may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system with
Motorcraft Premium Cooling System
Flush.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any engine coolant mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze or coolant.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
engine coolant.
When adding coolant:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
will escape as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted engine coolant meeting
the correct specification. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 351).
3. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
4. If necessary, add enough prediluted
engine coolant to bring the coolant level
to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
engine coolant as an approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed of
in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer increase the coolant
concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection. Engine
coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant and
may cause engine damage.
297
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized dealer decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection. Engine
coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted engine
coolant for optimum cooling system and
engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling
If you deplete the engine coolant supply,
fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before you incur
incremental component damage. The
fail-safe distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the engine
coolant temperature gauge will move to the
red (hot) area and:
the coolant temperature warning
light will illuminate
the service engine soon indicator
will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• This will disable the air conditioning
system.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start your engine. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
298
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
You have limited engine power when in the
fail-safe mode, so drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle will not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine will
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch off the engine.
2. Tow your vehicle to an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and add if low.
5. Re-start the engine and drive your vehicle
to an authorized dealer.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Engine Fluid Temperature Management (If
Equipped)
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of crash and injury,
be prepared that the vehicle speed
may reduce and the vehicle may not be able
to accelerate with full power until the fluid
temperatures reduce.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or hot.
Your vehicle can pull a trailer, but because
of the added load, your vehicle’ s engine may
temporarily reach higher temperatures during
severe operating conditions such as
ascending a long or steep grade while
pulling a trailer in high temperatures.
At this time, you may notice your engine
coolant temperature gauge needle move
toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO
LOWER TEMP message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power. In order
to manage the engine fluid temperatures,
your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on many factors such as vehicle
loading, towing, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no need
to pull off the road. You can continue to drive
your vehicle while this message is active.
The air conditioning may also cycle on and
off during severe operating conditions to
protect overheating of the engine. When the
engine coolant temperature decreases to a
normal operating temperature, the air
conditioning will turn on once again.
If the engine coolant temperature gauge
moves fully into the red (hot) area, or if the
coolant temperature warning or service
engine soon messages appear in your
information display:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
P.
299
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
moves away from the red (hot) area. After
several minutes, if the temperature does
not drop, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool before checking the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is normal, restart your
engine and continue.
5. If the coolant is low, add coolant, and
restart the engine. See Adding Engine
Coolant or How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
in this chapter for more information.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and change
the transmission fluid at the correct service
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
387). Your transmission does not consume
fluid. However, the fluid level should be
checked if the transmission is not working
properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of
fluid leakage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 3.5L ECOBOOST™/
3.7L
WARNING
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If you
notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact an
authorized dealer.
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level
WARNING
The dipstick and surrounding
components are hot. Use gloves when
moving components and checking the
transmission fluid level. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Only check the transmission fluid level when
the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).
300
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E190273
A
B
Minimum.A
Maximum.B
Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid
cap in a counterclockwise direction. See
Under Hood Overview (page 290).
3. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
cap and dipstick and remove it again to
check the fluid level.
4. Make sure that the fluid level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks. If the fluid
level is at the MIN mark, add fluid
immediately. See Adding Transmission
Fluid.
5. Replace the automatic transmission fluid
cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance.
Low Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the minimum range
(below point A) add the correct specification
fluid to be within the hash mark area. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 360).
Note: If the fluid level is below the minimum
range do not drive your vehicle. A low fluid
level can damage the transmission.
Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark area
(between points A and B) do not add any
fluid.
High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum range
(above point B) fluid may need to be
removed. High fluid levels may be caused
by a overheating condition. If you have
operated your vehicle at high speeds, towing
a trailer or in city traffic during hot weather,
allow your vehicle to cool for a minimum of
30 minutes before rechecking the level.
Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.
Adding Transmission Fluid
*
1. Rotate the automatic transmission fluid
cap in a counterclockwise direction.
2. Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
3. Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 360). Pour the fluid
directly into the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick hole.
4. Replace the cap and dipstick and remove
it again to check the fluid level.
301
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
5. Make sure that the fluid level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
6. Replace the automatic transmission fluid
cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise until
you feel a strong resistance.
*
Vehicles With EcoBoost Engine
WARNING
Do not run the engine with the air filter
disconnected.
1. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
2. Remove the air filter assembly securing
bolts.
3. Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
4. Rotate the air filter assembly slightly in a
counterclockwise direction.
5. Check the transmission fluid level.
6. Install the air filter assembly in reverse
order. Tighten the air filter assembly
securing bolts until you feel a strong
resistance.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNINGS
Do not use any fluid other than the
recommended brake fluid as this will
reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect fluid
could result in the loss of vehicle control,
serious personal injury or death.
Only use brake fluid from a sealed
container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage or failure.
Failure to adhere to this warning could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death.
Do not allow the fluid to touch your
skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse the
affected areas immediately with plenty of
water and contact your physician.
A fluid level between the MAX and
MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to add
fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating
range could compromise the performance
of the system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
E170684
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
351).
302
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 351).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal injury.
Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks or
lighted substances to come near the battery.
When working near the battery, always shield
your face and protect your eyes. Always
provide correct ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of children.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid
contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Shield
your eyes when working near the battery to
protect against possible splashing of acid
solution. In case of acid contact with skin or
eyes, flush immediately with water for a
minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,
make sure you reinstall the battery cover or
shield.
303
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Note: See an authorized dealer for battery
access, testing, or replacement.
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
Note: After cleaning or replacing the battery,
make sure you reinstall the battery cover or
shield.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the battery. Some engine
computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy, optimize the driveability and
performance of the engine. The clock and
radio station presets are also maintained in
memory by power from the low-voltage
battery. These settings are erased when a
technician disconnects and connects the
low-voltage battery.
To restore the settings, do the following:
Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio System
(page 377). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Windows and
Mirrors (page 97). Reset the radio station
presets. See Audio System (page 377).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the battery monitor system is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
304
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace wiper blades annually for optimum
performance.
Front Wiper Blades
Lift the wiper arms away from the windshield.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Press the locking buttons together.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
3. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place. Lower the wiper arm and blade
back to the windshield. The wiper arms will
automatically return to their normal position
when you switch the ignition on.
Rear Wiper Blade
Lift the wiper arms away from the rear
window.
E183236
305
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
1. Remove the wiper blade.
2. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The assembly plant properly aims the
headlamps on your vehicle. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, have the alignment
of your headlamps checked by your
authorized dealer.
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters) away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8
foot (2.4 meter) horizontal reference line
on the vertical wall or screen at this
height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Switch on the low beam headlamps to
light the wall or screen and open the
hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen, you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light located
at the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, you will need to adjust the
headlamp.
306
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
E171165
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to aim the headlamp.
6. Close the hood and switch off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this vehicle
and is non-adjustable.
REMOVING A HEADLAMP
To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp assembly,
you must first remove the front fascia and
front bumper assemblies. We recommend
you see an authorized dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
WARNINGS
Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off. Failure to follow this warning could
result in serious personal injury.
Bulbs can become hot. Let the bulb
cool down before removing it. Failure
to do so could result in personal injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See Bulb
Specification Chart (page 309).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp
These lamps operate at a high voltage. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
Front Fog Lamp
E220461
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
307
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
2. Use suitable tools, for example a
screwdriver and a socket wrench to
remove the four screws from the wheel
arch liner.
3. You can now carefully reposition the
wheel arch liner to allow access to the
front fog lamp bulb and electrical
connector.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
E174588
5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.
Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.
Front Direction Indicator Lamp
If a front direction indicator lamp fails, see
an authorized dealer.
LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See an
authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Side direction indicators.
• Approach lamp.
• Brake and rear lamps.
• Rear direction indicators.
• Reversing lamps.
• Central high mounted brake lamp.
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front parking lamps.
License Plate Lamp
E220617
1
2
3
1. Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Remove the screws that secure the lamp
assembly.
3. Remove the lamp lens.
308
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked
with an authorized D.O.T. marking for North
America to make sure they have the proper
lamp performance, light brightness, light
pattern and safe visibility. The correct bulbs
will not damage the lamp assembly or void
the lamp assembly warranty and will provide
quality bulb illumination time.
Exterior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDFront side marker lamps.
24PY24W SV+Front direction indicator.*
LEDLEDFront parking lamps.
35D3S
Headlamp low beam.
Headlamp high beam.
55H11Front fog lamps.
LEDLEDRear side marker lamp.
LEDLEDReversing lamp.
309
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLED
Brake and rear lamp.
Rear direction indicator.
LEDLEDCentral high mounted brake lamp.
5C5WLLicense plate lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
* To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
Interior Lamps
Power (Watt)SpecificationLamp
LEDLEDSignal indicator mirror light.*
51600XB
First row dome/map lamp.*
Second row dome/map lamps.*
10211-2XBThird row cargo lamp.*
1.337Visor vanity lamp.
Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
* To replace these lamps, see your authorized dealer.
310
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and personal burn injuries, do not start
your engine with the air cleaner removed
and do not remove it while the engine is
running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter the
air induction system. Engine components are
susceptible to damage not covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
387).
Incorrect component use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty. See
Motorcraft Parts (page 354).
To replace the air filter element do the
following:
E200522
x2
6
1
2
1. Remove the clips that secure the air filter
housing cover.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if it is
not properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
311
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean your
vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Materials
SpecificationName
-Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover
ZC-42
-Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
ZC-15
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash
ZC-3-A
-Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser (U.S.)
ZC-20 (U.S.)
-Engine Shampoo
-Motorcraft Leather and Vinyl Cleaner
ZC-56
-Multi-Purpose Cleaner
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S.)
ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
-Professional Strength Carpet and Upholstery Cleaner
ZC-54
-Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.)
ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (U.S.)
312
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
ZC-23 (U.S.)
-Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner
ZC-37-A
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended cleaners
can result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
313
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your vehicle
frequently. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
314
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’ s safety belts, as
these actions may weaken the belt webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents. Such
products could contaminate the side airbag
system and affect performance of the side
airbag in a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
318).
315
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Lincoln Black Label or Presidential
vehicles may have Alcantara microfiber cloth
fabric on the seats, headliner, floor mats and
door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
316
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or strong
detergents when cleaning the steering
wheel or instrument panel to avoid
contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
318).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
317
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium Leather
and Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to
warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
318
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush agitation
to remove brake dust and dirt, could wear
away the clear coat finish over a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or
high caustic-based wheel cleaners, steel
wool, fuels or strong household detergents.
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Apply
using manufacturer's instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy deposits
of dirt and brake dust accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of
water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use Motorcraft
Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
319
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
320
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
321
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your vehicle.
If you change the diameter of the tires from
that fitted at the factory, the speedometer
may not display the correct speed. Take your
vehicle to an authorized Ford dealer to have
the system reprogrammed. If you intend to
change the size of the wheels from that fitted
by the manufacturer, you can check the
suitability with an authorized dealer.
Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 324).
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressures can be found on the Tire Label,
which is located on the B-pillar or the edge
of the driver's door. This information can also
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door last post; next to the
driver’s seating position).
Ford strongly recommends maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the way
your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.
Note: Check your tire pressures at least once
per month.
Set the pressure for your spare tire to the
highest value given for your vehicle and tire
size combination (if equipped).
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners
WARNINGS
Utility vehicles have a significantly
higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. To reduce the risk of serious injury
or death from a rollover or other crash you
must avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers, drive at safe speeds for the
conditions, keep tires inflated to Ford
recommended pressures, never overload or
improperly load your vehicle, and make sure
every passenger is properly restrained.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt. All occupants
must wear seat belts and children/infants
must use appropriate restraints to minimize
the risk of injury or ejection.
Do not become overconfident in the
ability of four-wheel drive vehicles.
Although a four-wheel drive vehicle may
accelerate better than a two-wheel drive
vehicle in low traction situations, it won't stop
any faster than two-wheel drive vehicles.
Always drive at a safe speed.
322
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145298
Utility vehicles and trucks handle differently
than passenger cars in the various driving
conditions that are encountered on streets,
highways and off-road. Utility vehicles and
trucks are not designed for cornering at
speeds as high as passenger cars any more
than low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions.
Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to reduce
the risk of an accident or serious injury.
How your vehicle differs from other
vehicles
Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few noticeable
ways. Your vehicle may be:
E145299
323
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.
• Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components. All
other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
• Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.
E168583
As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and trucks
often will have a higher center of gravity and
a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded condition.
These differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently than
an ordinary passenger car.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
324
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
325
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the original
equipment tire sizes, recommended
inflation pressure and the maximum
weight the vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number (TIN): A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire size
and date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) or 36 psi (2.5 bar) depending
on tires size and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric or Metric
tires designed to carry a heavier
maximum load at 42 psi (2.9 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure beyond
this pressure will not increase the tire’s
load carrying capability.
*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a standard
unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour or
more and prior to the vehicle being
driven for 1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation pressure: The
cold inflation pressure found on the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member at the
side of the vehicle behind the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area between the
bead area and the tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
326
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
327
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81 mph (130 km/h) to
186 mph (299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
Speed ratingLetter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
Speed ratingLetter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
(TIN): This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets all
federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was manufactured,
the next two are the tire size code and
the last four numbers represent the
week and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean the 31st
week of 1997. After 2000, the numbers
328
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
go to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact customers
if a tire defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and
one-half times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
*Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C.
The grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
*Temperature: The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
329
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual, defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single, defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
330
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Recommended Tire Pressures and
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check the pressure
of all tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
331
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most common
cause of tire failures and may result
in severe tire cracking, tread separation,
or blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk of
injury. Under-inflation increase sidewall
flexing and rolling resistance, resulting
in heat build-up and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in unnecessary
tire stress, irregular wear, loss of vehicle
control, and accidents. A tire can lose
up to half of its air pressure and not
appear flat.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the recommended
cold inflation pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear. Under-inflation
or over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
You will find a Tire Label containing the
Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure by the tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is also found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch on the B-pillar, or on the edge
of the driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect
the way your vehicle handles.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel Valve
Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve stems
for holes, cracks, or cuts that may permit
air leakage and repair or replace the tire
and replace the valve stem. Inspect the
tire sidewalls for cracking, cuts, bruises
and other signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted and
inspected in case it needs to be repaired
or replaced. For your safety, tires that
are damaged or show signs of excessive
wear should not be used because they
are more likely to blow out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
332
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your vehicle
from skidding and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of smooth
rubber across the tread will appear on
the tire when the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the tire
is worn out and must be replaced.
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges in
the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the tread
or sidewall). If damage is observed or
suspected, have the tire inspected by a
tire professional. Tires can be damaged
during off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time depending
on many factors such as weather,
storage conditions, and conditions of
use (load, speed, inflation pressure) the
tires experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced after
six years regardless of tread wear.
However, heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process and may
require tires to be replaced more
frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.
333
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000, the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally
provided by Ford. The recommended
tire and wheel size may be found on
either the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or the Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or edge of the
driver’s door. If this information is not
found on these labels then you should
contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk
WARNINGS
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.
Additionally the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case or power transfer unit
failure. If you have questions regarding
tire replacement, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
To reduce the risk of serious injury,
when mounting replacement tires
and wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater
than the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following precautions must
be taken to protect the person mounting
the tire:
334
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should do
the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with a
remote air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle.
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud, or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires. Spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
*Avoid potholes and objects on the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
335
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive, there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and wheel.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are driving,
the wheels may be out of alignment.
Have an authorized dealer check the
wheel alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear,
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly, it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
336
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
E142547
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING
Snow tires must be the same size, load
index, and speed rating as those
originally provided by Ford. Use of any tire
or wheel not recommended by Ford can
affect the safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury, and death. Additionally, the
use of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension, axle,
transfer case, or power transfer unit failure.
It is also strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the driver’s
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door. Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: The suspension insulation and
bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage.
Do not remove these components from your
vehicle when using snow tires and chains.
The tires on your vehicle have all-weather
treads to provide traction in rain and snow.
However, in some climates, you may need
to use snow tires and cables. If you need to
use cables, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specifications)
be used, as cables may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and chains:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle.
• Use only SAE Class S snow chains, snow
cables or equivalent on the front axle for
P235/55R19 equipped vehicles. The use
of snow chains, snow cables or other
traction assist devices that are larger than
SAE Class S may cause damage to your
vehicle’s wheel house, suspension or
body.
337
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Do not install tire chains, cables, or
optional traction devices on the rear tires.
This could cause damage to the vehicle’s
wheel house or body.
• Do not use tire chains, cables or optional
traction devices with optional 255/45R20
tires.
• Install cable chains securely, verifying
that the cables do not touch any wiring,
brake lines or fuel lines.
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) with
tire cables on your vehicle.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against your vehicle, stop
and retighten the cables. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
damage to your vehicle.
• Remove the tire cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use tire cables on
dry roads.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system is
not a substitute for manually checking
tire pressure. The tire pressure should be
checked periodically (at least monthly) using
a tire gauge, see Inflating your tires in this
chapter. Failure to properly maintain your
tire pressure could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
338
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must accept
any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
339
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. The low tire pressure warning light
will turn on if the tire pressure is significantly
low. Once the light is illuminated, your tires
are under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
340
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When your temporary spare tire
is installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
341
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 kPa) from
a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as being
significantly lower than the recommended
inflation pressure and activate the system
warning light for low tire pressure. If the low
tire pressure warning light is on, visually
check each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If
one or more tires are flat, repair as
necessary. Check the air pressure in the road
tires. If any tire is under-inflated, carefully
drive the vehicle to the nearest location
where air can be added to the tires. Inflate
all the tires to the recommended inflation
pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNINGS
The use of tire sealant may damage
your tire pressure monitoring system
and should only be used in roadside
emergencies. If you must use a sealant, the
Ford Tire Mobility Kit sealant should be used.
The tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel must be
replaced by an authorized dealer after use
of the sealant.
WARNINGS
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 338). If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged, it will no longer
function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light will illuminate when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
If you get a flat tire while driving, do not apply
the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 338).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have the authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
342
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines could
result in an increased risk of loss of
vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided by Ford.
If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is
damaged, it should be replaced rather than
repaired.
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly
that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be
one of three types:
1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire begins
with the letter T for tire size and may have
Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label on
wheel: This spare tire has a label on the
wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE
ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar spare
tires listed above, do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed
above at any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
3. Full-size dissimilar spare without label
on wheel
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
343
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Tire Change Procedure
WARNINGS
When one of the front wheels is off the
ground, the transmission alone will not
prevent your vehicle from moving or slipping
off the jack, even if the transmission is in park
(P) or neutral (N).
WARNINGS
To help prevent your vehicle from
moving when you change a tire, be
sure to place the transmission in park (P) or
neutral (N), set the parking brake, and block
(in both directions) the wheel that is
diagonally opposite (other side and end of
your vehicle) to the tire being changed.
Never get underneath a vehicle that is
supported only by a jack. If the vehicle
slips off the jack, you or someone else could
be seriously injured.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving
traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating the
jack or changing the wheel.
Always use the jack provided as
original equipment with your vehicle.
If using a jack other than the one provided
as original equipment with your vehicle,
make sure the jack capacity is adequate for
the vehicle weight, including any vehicle
cargo or modifications.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to avoid
damage to the vehicle.
Non-Limousine
Note: If the third row seat is stowed in the
floor, you will need to unstow it to access
the spare tire.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
344
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E211099
4. Remove the carpeted floor panel located
in the rear of the vehicle, then remove
the wing nut that secures the spare tire
by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
6. Remove the second wing nut that
secures the jack retention bracket by
turning it counterclockwise. Then remove
the jack kit from the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack, L-shaped bolt, and the
wrench from the felt bag. Fold down the
wrench socket to use to loosen the lug
nuts and to operate the jack.
8. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but
do not remove them until the wheel is
raised off the ground.
E145908
9. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E201156
10. Put the jack in the jack notch next to
the tire you are changing. Turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is
completely off the ground.
11. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
12. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
13. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
345
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
14. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 349).
15. Install the wheel cover.
Limousine
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.
E142551
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
E211467
4. Remove the wing nut that secures the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
5. Lift and remove the spare tire from the
trunk.
346
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E211468
6. Remove the lug wrench (A) and jack (B)
from the jack foam pockets.
7. Remove the wheel cover with the lug
wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug
nut one-half turn counterclockwise, but
do not remove them until the wheel is
raised off the ground.
E145908
8. The vehicle jacking points are shown
above, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
E201156
9. Put the jack in the jack notch next to the
tire you are changing. Turn the jack
handle clockwise until the wheel is
completely off the ground.
10. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
11. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered.
12. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
13. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 349).
14. Install the wheel cover.
347
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the flat tire
E194296
If you are stowing the flat tire, remove the
L-shaped bolt from the external pocket of
the felt bag. With the third row seat in the
raised position, stand the flat tire in the rear
of the vehicle with the tire’ s valve stem facing
the rear of the vehicle. Fasten the flat tire to
the vehicle by inserting the L-shaped bolt
through one of the lug bolt holes in the
wheel. Turn it clockwise into the threaded
hole in the vehicle until the tire is secured.
If you are stowing the temporary spare tire,
place the tire over the jack and secure it with
the large wing nut.
Stowing the jack
E211100
1. Fully collapse the jack, fold the lug
wrench socket into the handle and place
the jack and wrench into the felt bag as
shown. Place the extension bolt or
L-shaped bolt into the external pocket of
the felt bag. Position the jack as shown
to make sure that the locating holes in
the jack base can be placed on the
locating tabs of the jack mounting
bracket in the spare tire tub.
2. Securely close the wrench compartment
and the jack bag using the Velcro™ straps.
3. Place the jack kit on the angled bracket
in the spare tire tub, using the locating
tabs to position the jack correctly.
E211101
348
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
4. Insert the straight end of the jack
retention bracket through the eyelet of
the angled bracket and swing the
retention bracket over the jack. With the
jack in place, place the looped end of the
retention bracket over the threaded stud
in the trunk floor and secure it with the
plastic wing nut.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the
surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the
hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of control.
lb.ft (Nm)Bolt size
100 lb.ft (135 Nm)1/2 x 20
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5 (Limousine only)
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire, wheel removal).
349
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
350
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
2.0L EcoBoostEngine
122Cubic inches
1-3-4-2Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.028 in (0.7 mm) - 0.031 in (0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
9.3:1Compression ratio
351
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E161383
A
B
The long drivebelt is on the first
pulley groove closest to engine.
A.
The short drivebelt is on the
second pulley groove farthest from
engine.
B.
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoBoostEngine
214Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.030 in (0.76 mm) - 0.033 in (0.84 mm)Spark plug gap
10:1Compression ratio
352
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E191904
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
3.7LEngine
226Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
0.049 in (1.25 mm) - 0.053 in (1.35 mm)Spark plug gap
10.5:1Compression ratio
353
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E191904
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
2.0L EcoBoost EngineComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-910-SOil filter
BXT-65-650Battery
SP-537Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2429 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2235 (passenger side)
354
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
2.0L EcoBoost EngineComponent
WW-1202 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 387).
355
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
3.5L EcoBoost EngineComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-534Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2429 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2235 (passenger side)
WW-1202 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 387).
356
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.7L
3.7L EngineComponent
FA-1884Air filter element
FL-500-SOil filter
BXT-65-750Battery
SP-520Spark plugs
FP-68Cabin air filter
WW-2429 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-2235 (passenger side)
WW-1202 (rear window)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at an authorized dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance, emissions and
durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 387).
357
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
358
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission code
along with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
GSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
JSix-speed automatic transmission 6F50
6Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35
359
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil
11.6 qt (11 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
9.0 qt (8.5 L)*Automatic transmission fluid
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
2.45 lb (1.11 kg)A/C refrigerant
7.9 fl oz (235 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
* Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
360
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
361
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
362
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
363
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
364
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.7 qt (13 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15)Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive)
10.9 qt (10.3 L)*Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)
11.6 qt (11 L)*Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
365
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
2.45 lb (1.11 kg)A/C refrigerant
7.9 fl oz (235 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M2C946-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QFS
366
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
367
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
368
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
369
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
370
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.7L
Capacities
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system
can cause personal injury. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil
13.2 qt (12.5 L)Engine coolant
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid
2.4 pt (1.15)Rear differential fluid
10.9 qt (10.3 L)*Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)
11.6 qt (11 L)*Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)
17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive)
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid
18.6 gal (70.4 L)Fuel tank
371
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
2.31 lb (1.05 kg)A/C refrigerant
8.9 fl oz (265 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil
*Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (U.S.):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12
WSS-M2C945-ARecommended motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP
WSS-M2C945-AOptional motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Full Synthetic Motor Oil
XO-5W20-QFS
372
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C945-AOptional Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LFS12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear axle fluid (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
373
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R
374
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5
--Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
--Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1
375
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not available,
use motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Council (ILSAC).
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage and
possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON LV transmission fluid. The use
of any other fluid may cause transmission
damage.
376
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
377
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and injury.
We strongly recommend that you use
extreme caution when using any device that
may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
378
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
E210744
379
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press this button. The system stops at the first station
it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS mode, press to select the next or previous satellite radio station. If a specific category is selected
(such as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next or previous in the selected category. In CD mode, press to select the previous
or next track. Press and hold to move quickly forward through the current track.
A
Eject: Press to eject a CD.B
CD slot: Insert a CD.C
TUNE: In radio mode, press to manually search through the radio frequency band. In SIRIUS mode, press to find the previous or
next available satellite radio station.
D
Volume: Press to adjust the volume.E
Power: Press to switch the system on and off.F
Rear Seat Audio Controls (If Equipped)
E182082
380
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
VOL: Press to adjust the volume.A
MEDIA: Scroll through available audio system modes.B
Display: Shows the status of the current mode selected.C
CLOCK: Press to display the clock.D
SEEK: Select the next or previous stored radio frequency station, SIRIUS radio channel or CD track.E
USB PORT
E176344
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.
MEDIA HUB
You can locate the media hub inside the
center console or on the instrument panel.
E211463
See your SYNC information.
381
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Audio System
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit the online
store web site:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Side window deflectors.
Interior Style
• Floor mats.
• Rear seat entertainment*.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup or smoker's package.
• Camping tents*.
• Cargo organization and management.
• Conversation mirror.
• Hitch-mounted bike carrier*.
• Racks and carriers.
• Trailer towing accessories.
Peace of Mind
• Car cover*.
• Locking fuel plug.
• Remote start.
• Vehicle security systems.
• Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
382
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Ask an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones and
theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly if
the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
383
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford owners have
discovered the powerful protection of Ford
Extended Service Plan. It is the extended
service plan backed by Ford Motor Company,
and provides peace of mind protection
beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and labor
– can easily exceed the price of your Ford
Extended Service Plan. With Ford ESP you
minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills
and rising repair costs.
Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four core Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete that
we generally only discuss what’s not
covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford dealers in the U.S.,
Canada and Mexico. It is the extended
service plan authorized and backed by Ford
Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation.
384
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage to
the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle was
properly maintained with Ford ESP, thereby
improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and selected wear
items. The coverage is prepaid, so you never
have to worry about affording your vehicle’ s
maintenance. It covers regular checkups,
routine inspections, preventive care and
replacement of select items that require
periodic attention for normal wear:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc.
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an affordable,
no interest, no fee payment program allowing
you all the security and benefits Ford ESP
has to offer while paying over time. You are
pre-approved with no credit checks, no
hassles! To learn more, call our Ford ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377.
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Ford Extended Service Plan.
Ford Extended Service Plan is the only
service contract backed by Ford Motor
Company of Canada, Limited. Depending on
the plan you purchase, Ford Extended
Service Plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
385
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance and
deductible combinations. Each plan is
tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Ford Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Ford Extended Service Plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Extended Service Plan that is right for
you.
386
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 351).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
387
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10000 miles (16000
kilometers).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles (800
kilometers) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor
after each oil change. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 295).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or 5000
miles (8000 kilometers) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil change
intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
388
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
389
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
390
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
391
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED message
Vehicle use and exampleInterval
Normal
7500-10000 miles
(12000-16000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5000-7499 miles
(8000-11999 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3000-4999 miles
(4800-7999 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
392
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal Maintenance Intervals
At every oil change interval as indicated by the information display
*
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection (recommended).
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
*
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
**
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).
393
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt(s).
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt(s).
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated
distance for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100000 miles (160000 kilometers).
394
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3000 miles
(4800 kilometers) of the message appearing
in your information display prompting you to
change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28751 miles (46270 kilometers). Perform
the 30000-mile (48000-kilometer)
automatic transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30000 miles
(48000 kilometers) (for example, the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was reset at
25000 miles [40000 kilometers]).
Perform the engine air filter replacement.
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints (AWD only).Inspect frequently, service
as required
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
395
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a trailer or using a car-top carrier
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.
*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
*
This is an optional feature.
396
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.
*
Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
**
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change PTU and rear axle fluid (AWD only). See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.
*
This is an optional feature.
**
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 294).
Exclusive use of E85 (flex fuel vehicles only)
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change
397
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (AWD only)
in your vehicle does not require any normal
scheduled maintenance. Vehicles are
electronically monitored and notify the driver
required service by displaying a message in
the information display. The PTU lubricant
will be more likely to require a change if the
vehicle has experienced extended periods
of extreme/severe duty cycle driving.
Changing or checking the PTU lubricant is
not necessary unless the unit has been
submerged in water, shows signs of leakage
or a message indicating required service is
displayed. Contact your authorized dealer
for service.
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles
operating in the Middle East, North Africa,
Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with similar
climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 5000 miles
(8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air filter
and cabin air filter is dependent on exposure
to dusty and dirty conditions. Vehicles
operated in these conditions require frequent
inspection and replacement of the engine
air filter and cabin air filter.
398
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
399
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
400
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
401
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
402
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
403
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
404
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
405
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
406
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
407
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
408
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
409
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
410
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
411
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
412
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
413
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
414
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
415
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
416
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
417
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
418
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
419
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
420
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
421
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (i) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
422
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
423
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
424
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
425
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (i) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
426
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
427
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim. Arbitration
fees and incentives.
• i. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
428
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’ s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(i) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or http://www.telenav.com from
time to time to review the then current
version of this Agreement and of the privacy
policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
429
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
i. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
430
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
431
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
432
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
433
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
434
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
435
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
436
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
437
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
438
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Appendices
A
A/C
See: Climate Control...........................................127
About This Manual............................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................190
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................190
Accessories...................................................382
Exterior Style.......................................................382
Interior Style.........................................................382
Lifestyle.................................................................382
Peace of Mind.....................................................382
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control..............207
Active Park Assist..........................................197
Automatic Steering into Parking Space........199
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature...........200
Troubleshooting the System............................201
Using Active Park Assist....................................198
Adaptive Headlamps.....................................94
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................306
Horizontal Aim Adjustment..............................307
Vertical Aim Adjustment...................................306
Adjusting the Pedals......................................85
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.....................82
Easy Entry and Exit Feature...............................82
End of Travel Position..........................................82
Memory Feature....................................................82
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps..................................94
Airbag Disposal...............................................57
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control...........................................127
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter................311
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm............................................81
All-Wheel Drive...............................................181
Ambient Lighting............................................96
Anti-Theft Alarm...............................................81
Arming the Alarm...................................................81
Disarming the Alarm.............................................81
Appendices.....................................................419
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............107
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................107
Keyless Warning Alert........................................107
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................107
Audio Control...................................................83
MEDIA......................................................................83
Seek, Next or Previous........................................83
Audio System.................................................377
General Information...........................................377
Audio Unit.......................................................378
Rear Seat Audio Controls.................................380
Autolamps........................................................90
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps.........91
Automatic Climate Control..........................127
Automatic High Beam Control....................92
Activating the System..........................................93
Manually Overriding the System.......................93
Automatic Transmission...............................177
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................180
Brake-Shift Interlock...........................................179
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................180
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission.............178
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.................................177
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................300
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check - 3.5L
Ecoboost™/3.7L...........................................300
Adding Transmission Fluid ..............................301
Checking the Transmission Fluid Level........300
Autowipers.......................................................86
439
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Auxiliary Power Points..................................157
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................157
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................157
Locations................................................................157
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive............................................181
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.......................303
Blind Spot Information System..................221
Switching the System Off and On..................224
System Errors......................................................223
Using the System...............................................222
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............287
Booster Seats..................................................30
Types of Booster Seats........................................31
Brake Fluid Check.......................................302
Brakes..............................................................190
General Information............................................190
Breaking-In.....................................................253
Bulb Specification Chart.............................309
C
Cabin Air Filter................................................131
California Proposition 65................................11
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................360
Specifications.......................................................361
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................365
Specifications......................................................366
Capacities and Specifications - 3.7L.........371
Specifications......................................................372
Capacities and Specifications....................351
Cargo Nets.....................................................234
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior................................313
Center Console.............................................159
Console Refrigerator and Freezer..................159
Second Row Center Console...........................159
Changing a Bulb...........................................307
Front Direction Indicator Lamp.......................308
Front Fog Lamp...................................................307
High Intensity Discharge Headlamp..............307
LED Lamps...........................................................308
License Plate Lamp............................................308
Changing a Fuse..........................................285
Fuses.....................................................................285
Changing a Road Wheel.............................342
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................343
Tire Change Procedure....................................344
Changing the 12V Battery..........................303
Changing the Engine Air Filter....................311
Changing the Wiper Blades......................305
Front Wiper Blades............................................305
Rear Wiper Blade...............................................305
Checking MyKey System Status.................67
Checking the Wiper Blades.......................305
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................45
Child Restraint Positioning...........................33
Child Safety.......................................................16
General Information..............................................16
Child Safety Locks..........................................34
Left-Hand Side.......................................................35
Right-Hand Side....................................................35
Cleaning Leather Seats...............................318
Cleaning Products.........................................312
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels..........................318
Cleaning the Engine.....................................314
Cleaning the Exterior....................................313
Exterior Chrome Parts........................................313
Exterior Plastic Parts...........................................314
Stripes or Graphics..............................................314
Underbody............................................................314
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens............................317
440
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Cleaning the Interior.....................................315
Cleaning Black Label or Presidential
Interior................................................................316
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades............................................................315
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................65
Climate Control..............................................127
Climate Controlled Seats............................150
Cooled Seats........................................................150
Heated Seats........................................................150
Collision Warning System..........................229
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................229
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................296
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........55
Creating a MyKey...........................................64
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................64
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................224
False Alerts..........................................................228
Switching the System Off and On..................228
System Errors......................................................228
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................227
System Limitations.............................................227
Using the System...............................................224
Cruise Control..................................................83
Principle of Operation.......................................206
Type 1.......................................................................83
Type 2......................................................................84
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................206
Customer Assistance...................................261
D
Data Recording..................................................9
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.........................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...............................92
Direction Indicators........................................95
Lane Change..........................................................95
Drive Control.................................................232
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL............................232
Driver Alert......................................................215
Using Driver Alert................................................215
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................49
Children and Airbags...........................................50
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................50
Driving Aids....................................................215
Driving Hints..................................................253
Driving Through Water...............................253
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................92
E
Economical Driving......................................253
Emission Control System.............................173
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................174
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing......................................................175
End User License Agreement....................419
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .....................................419
Engine Block Heater....................................165
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................166
Engine Coolant Check................................296
Adding Engine Coolant....................................296
Checking the Engine Coolant.........................296
Recycled Engine Coolant.................................297
Severe Climates..................................................297
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling.............................................................298
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................79
Engine Oil Check.........................................294
Adding Engine Oil..............................................294
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L
EcoBoost™....................................................294
441
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Ecoboost™/
3.7L................................................................294
Engine Specifications - 2.0L
EcoBoost™.....................................................351
Drivebelt Routing................................................352
Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................352
Drivebelt Routing................................................353
Engine Specifications - 3.7L.......................353
Drivebelt Routing................................................354
Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks............................246
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................248
Hitches..................................................................246
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................249
Safety Chains.......................................................247
Trailer Brake Controller Connector...............248
Trailer Brakes.......................................................247
Trailer Lamps.......................................................248
Trailer Towing Connector (Vehicles with a
Trailer Towing Package and 7–Pin
Connector).......................................................246
When Towing a Trailer.......................................248
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..............................................9
Export Unique Options...................................14
Extended Service Plan (ESP).....................384
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (CANADA
ONLY)................................................................385
EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN (U.S. Only)........384
Exterior Mirrors................................................98
Auto-dimming Feature........................................99
Blind Spot Information System........................100
Direction Indicator Mirrors ................................99
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................99
Heated Exterior Mirrors ......................................99
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror..............................99
Memory Mirrors ....................................................99
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................98
Puddle Lamps........................................................99
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................37
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.......................................40
Seatbelt Extension Assembly............................42
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................39
Third Row Seatbelt Stowage.............................38
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy..................38
Floor Mats......................................................254
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................94
Foot Pedals
See: Adjusting the Pedals..................................85
Front Fog Lamps.............................................94
Front Passenger Sensing System...............51
Fuel and Refueling........................................167
Fuel Consumption.........................................172
Calculating Fuel Economy................................172
Filling the Tank.....................................................172
Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................169
Fuel Quality.....................................................168
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................168
Fuel Shutoff....................................................257
Fuses...............................................................269
Fuse Specification Chart............................269
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel...........278
Power Distribution Box.....................................269
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............152
Gauges.............................................................103
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................58
Intelligent Access.................................................58
442
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
General Maintenance Information...........387
Multi-Point Inspection.......................................390
Owner Checks and Services...........................389
Protecting Your Investment..............................387
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.............................387
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?......................................................387
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................265
Getting the Services You Need.................261
Away From Home...............................................261
Global Opening and Closing.......................98
Closing the Windows...........................................98
Opening the Windows.........................................98
H
Handbrake
See: Parking Brake..............................................191
Hazard Warning Flashers...........................257
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.......................306
Headlamp Exit Delay......................................91
Headlamp Leveling........................................94
Headlamp Removal
See: Removing a Headlamp............................307
Head Restraints.............................................133
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................134
Tilting Head Restraints ......................................135
Heated Seats..................................................148
Front Seats............................................................148
Second-Row Heated Seats...............................149
Heated Steering Wheel.................................84
Heated Windows and Mirrors.....................131
Heated Exterior Mirror........................................131
Heated Rear Window..........................................131
Heating
See: Climate Control...........................................127
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................129
Cooling the Interior Quickly.............................129
General Hints.......................................................129
Heating the Interior Quickly.............................129
Recommended Settings for Cooling .............129
Recommended Settings for Heating..............129
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather.............................................................129
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................190
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............287
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................262
Information Display Control.........................84
Information Displays.....................................108
General Information............................................108
443
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Information Messages..................................115
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................116
AdvanceTrac™........................................................116
Alarm........................................................................117
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................117
AWD.........................................................................118
Battery and Charging System...........................118
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System................................................................119
Brake System........................................................119
Collision Warning System.................................120
Doors and Locks.................................................120
Fuel..........................................................................121
Keys and Intelligent Access...............................121
Lane Keeping System........................................122
Maintenance.........................................................122
MyKey.....................................................................123
Park Aid..................................................................124
Power Steering....................................................125
Seats.......................................................................125
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................126
Traction Control...................................................126
Transmission.........................................................126
Installing Child Restraints..............................18
Child Seats...............................................................18
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts............................18
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................24
Using Tether Straps..............................................26
Instrument Cluster.........................................103
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.........................91
Interior Lamps..................................................96
Front Row Map Lamps.........................................96
Second Row Map Lamps....................................96
Interior Mirror.................................................100
Auto-Dimming Mirror..........................................100
Second Row Illuminated Vanity Mirror..........100
Introduction.........................................................7
J
Jump Starting the Vehicle..........................258
Connecting the Jumper Cables.....................259
Jump Starting......................................................259
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................258
Removing the Jumper Cables........................260
K
Keyless Entry....................................................76
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry Keypad.............76
Keyless Starting..............................................161
Ignition Modes......................................................161
Keys and Remote Controls..........................58
L
Lane Keeping System..................................216
Switching the System On and Off...................217
Lighting Control..............................................89
Headlamp Flasher................................................90
High Beams............................................................90
Lighting..............................................................89
General Information.............................................89
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services.......11
Load Carrying................................................234
Load Limit.......................................................235
Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................242
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer................................................................235
444
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Locking and Unlocking..................................70
Activating Intelligent Access...............................71
Autolock..................................................................72
Autounlock..............................................................72
Battery Saver..........................................................73
Enabling or Disabling Autolock and
Autounlock.........................................................72
Illuminated Entry....................................................73
Illuminated Exit.......................................................73
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................70
Opening a Rear Door From the Inside.............71
Power Door Locks................................................70
Remote Control.....................................................70
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys.......................................................................71
Locks..................................................................70
Luggage Covers...........................................234
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................342
M
Maintenance..................................................286
General Information...........................................286
Media Hub.......................................................381
Memory Function..........................................138
Easy Entry and Exit Feature..............................139
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key Fob
.............................................................................139
Saving a PreSet Position...................................139
Message Center
See: Information Displays.................................108
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors..................131
See: Windows and Mirrors..................................97
Mobile Communications Equipment...........13
Moonroof..........................................................101
Closing the Moonroof and Sunshades..........102
Opening the Sunshade and Moonroof...........101
Venting the Moonroof........................................102
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L EcoBoost™...........354
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™...........356
Motorcraft Parts - 3.7L.................................357
MyKey Troubleshooting................................68
MyKey™..............................................................63
Principle of Operation..........................................63
N
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..............391
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™...............................391
Normal Maintenance Intervals........................393
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset.......................295
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................294
Opening and Closing the Hood...............287
Closing the Hood...............................................287
Opening the Hood.............................................287
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................266
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............266
Overhead Console.......................................160
P
Parking Aids....................................................196
Principle of Operation........................................196
Parking Brake..................................................191
Passive Anti-Theft System............................79
SecuriLock®............................................................79
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System........................79
Pedals................................................................85
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™...............................47
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................47
445
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................70
Power Liftgate..................................................73
Obstacle Detection...............................................76
Opening and Closing the Liftgate.....................74
Setting the Liftgate Open Height......................76
Stopping the Liftgate Movement......................76
Power Seats....................................................136
Four Way Power Lumbar...................................138
Power Lumbar (Limo/Livery).............................138
Power Steering Fluid Check......................303
Power Windows...............................................97
Accessory Delay...................................................98
Bounce-Back..........................................................97
One-Touch Down..................................................97
One-Touch Up........................................................97
Window Lock..........................................................97
Protecting the Environment..........................15
R
Rear Parking Aid............................................197
Rear Passenger Climate Controls.............130
Rear Seats.......................................................140
Adjusting the Rear Seats...................................140
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................234
Rear View Camera.......................................203
Using the Rear View Camera System...........203
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera...................................203
Rear Window Wiper and Washers..............87
Rear Camera Washer...........................................88
Rear Window Washer..........................................88
Rear Window Wiper..............................................87
Recommended Towing Weights...............244
Refueling..........................................................170
Remote Control...............................................59
Car Finder...............................................................60
Intelligent Access Key.........................................59
Memory Feature....................................................62
Remote Start..........................................................60
Replacing the Battery..........................................59
Sounding the Panic Alarm..................................60
Remote Start...................................................132
Automatic Settings..............................................132
Removing a Headlamp...............................307
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..................318
Replacement Parts Recommendation........12
Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts........................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................62
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................267
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......267
Roadside Assistance...................................256
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................257
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance
Program Coverage........................................257
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................257
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................256
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................256
Roadside Emergencies...............................256
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................253
Running Out of Fuel.....................................169
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................169
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................169
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................54
Safety Precautions........................................167
Scheduled Maintenance Record..............399
Scheduled Maintenance.............................387
Seatbelt Height Adjustment.........................42
446
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................44
Belt-Minder™...........................................................44
Seatbelts...........................................................36
Principle of Operation..........................................36
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................43
Conditions of operation......................................43
Seats.................................................................133
Security..............................................................79
Side Airbags.....................................................53
Sitting in the Correct Position....................133
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................337
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On-board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...........................13
Special Instructions...............................................13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance...............................................395
Exceptions............................................................398
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................206
Stability Control.............................................194
Principle of Operation........................................194
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................162
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................164
Failure to Start......................................................163
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes..................165
Important Ventilating Information...................165
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................164
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................164
Starting and Stopping the Engine..............161
General Information.............................................161
Steering..........................................................228
Electric Power Steering....................................228
Steering Wheel................................................82
Storage Compartments...............................159
Sunroof
See: Moonroof......................................................101
Sun Visors.......................................................100
Illuminated Vanity Mirror....................................101
Supplementary Restraints System.............48
Principle of Operation..........................................48
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
T
Tailgate
See: Power Liftgate..............................................73
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications................351
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)..........................263
Tire Care.........................................................324
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................326
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................324
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................327
Temperature A B C............................................325
Traction AA A B C...............................................325
Treadwear............................................................325
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............338
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.........................................339
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................340
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................322
Towing a Trailer.............................................243
Load Placement..................................................243
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................250
Emergency Towing............................................250
Recreational Towing...........................................251
447
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels - 3.5L
Ecoboost™/3.7L............................................251
Emergency Towing.............................................251
Recreational Towing...........................................251
Towing.............................................................243
Traction Control.............................................192
Principle of Operation........................................192
Trailer Sway Control....................................244
Transmission Code Designation..............359
Transmission...................................................177
Transmission
See: Transmission................................................177
Transporting the Vehicle............................249
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
EcoBoost™...................................................288
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™....................................................290
Under Hood Overview - 3.7L....................292
Engine Shield......................................................293
Universal Garage Door Opener................152
HomeLink Wireless Control System...............152
USB Port..........................................................381
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................207
Automatic Cancellation.......................................211
Blocked Sensor....................................................213
Canceling the Set Speed..................................210
Changing the Set Speed....................................211
Detection Issues...................................................211
Following a Vehicle...........................................208
Hilly Condition Usage.........................................211
Overriding the System.......................................210
Resuming the Set Speed....................................211
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed...............208
Setting the Gap Distance.................................209
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off...........211
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On........208
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...............214
System Not Available.........................................213
Using All-Wheel Drive...................................181
Driving In Special Conditions With All-Wheel
Drive (AWD)......................................................184
Operating AWD Vehicles With Mismatched
Tires....................................................................183
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
Tires....................................................................182
Using Cruise Control...................................206
Switching Cruise Control Off...........................207
Switching Cruise Control On...........................206
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................68
Using Snow Chains......................................337
Using Stability Control.................................195
Using Traction Control.................................192
Switching the System Off..................................192
System Indicator Lights and Messages.........192
Using a Switch.....................................................192
Using the Information Display Controls........192
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................264
V
Vehicle Care...................................................312
General Information............................................312
Vehicle Certification Label.........................358
Vehicle Identification Number..................358
Vehicle Storage.............................................319
Battery...................................................................320
Body........................................................................319
Brakes...................................................................320
Cooling system...................................................320
Engine...................................................................320
Fuel system..........................................................320
General..................................................................319
Miscellaneous.....................................................320
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................320
Tires.......................................................................320
448
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
Ventilation
See: Climate Control...........................................127
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number...............358
Voice Control...................................................83
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................104
Adaptive Cruise Control....................................104
Airbag Readiness................................................104
Anti-Lock Braking System.................................104
Battery....................................................................104
Brake System Warning Light............................104
Charging System.................................................105
Cruise Control......................................................105
Direction Indicator..............................................105
Door Ajar...............................................................105
Engine Coolant Temperature...........................105
Engine Oil..............................................................105
Fasten Seatbelt....................................................105
Front Fog Lamps.................................................106
Head Up Display.................................................106
High Beam............................................................106
Liftgate Ajar..........................................................106
Low Fuel Level.....................................................106
Low Tire Pressure Warning..............................106
Low Washer Fluid................................................106
Parking Lamps.....................................................106
Powertrain Malfunction/Reduced Power......106
Service Engine Soon..........................................106
Stability Control....................................................107
Stability Control Off.............................................107
Washer Fluid Check....................................303
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior................................313
See: Wipers and Washers..................................86
Waxing..............................................................314
Welcome Lighting...........................................95
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................342
Wheels and Tires.........................................322
General Information...........................................322
Technical Specifications...................................349
Windows and Mirrors.....................................97
Windshield Washers.......................................87
Windshield Wipers.........................................86
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................86
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades...................305
Wipers and Washers......................................86
Wrecker Towing
See: Transporting the Vehicle.........................249
449
MKT (), enUSA, First Printing
Index
